Hardtop (2024) - Car MINI - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Car
Brand	MINI
Model	Hardtop (2024)
Category	Subcompact / Hatchback
Year	2024
Body Style	3-door Hatchback
Seating Capacity	4 passengers
Engine Options	1.5L 3-cylinder Turbo (134 hp) or 2.0L 4-cylinder Turbo (189 hp)
Transmission	6-speed manual or 7-speed dual-clutch automatic
Drive Type	Front-wheel drive
Fuel Type	Gasoline
Fuel Tank Capacity	Approx. 44 liters (11.6 gallons)
Dimensions (L x W x H)	Approx. 3,850 mm x 1,730 mm x 1,400 mm
Wheelbase	Approx. 2,495 mm
Curb Weight	Approx. 1,220 - 1,280 kg
Trunk Capacity	Approx. 211 liters (behind rear seats)
Safety Features	ABS, ESC, multiple airbags, rearview camera, parking sensors
Infotainment	8.8-inch touchscreen, Apple CarPlay, USB ports
Fuel Consumption (combined)	Approx. 6.0 - 7.0 L/100 km (depending on engine)
Warranty	4 years / 80,000 km (manufacturer warranty)

Frequently Asked Questions - Hardtop (2024) MINI

Where can I download the user manual for the MINI Hardtop 2024?

You can download the free PDF manual from notice-facile.com by selecting your model and clicking the download button.

What type of fuel does the MINI Hardtop 2024 use?

The MINI Hardtop 2024 runs on gasoline. Premium unleaded (91 octane or higher) is recommended.

How many passengers can the MINI Hardtop seat?

The MINI Hardtop seats 4 passengers in a 2+2 configuration, with two seats in the rear.

What is the trunk capacity of the MINI Hardtop?

The trunk offers approximately 211 liters of cargo space, which can be expanded by folding the rear seats.

Does the MINI Hardtop 2024 come with a warranty?

Yes, it includes a 4-year/80,000 km manufacturer warranty. Some components may have extended coverage.

How do I pair my phone via Bluetooth?

Go to the infotainment settings, enable Bluetooth, and select 'Pair new device'. Then find the MINI on your phone and confirm the PIN.

What is the recommended tire pressure for the MINI Hardtop?

Recommended tire pressure is typically 2.2 bar (32 psi) for front and rear, but check the sticker on the driver's door sill.

Can I use E85 ethanol in my MINI Hardtop?

No, the MINI Hardtop is not E85 compatible. Use only gasoline as specified in the manual to avoid engine damage.

How do I reset the service light?

Insert the key, press and hold the trip reset button, then turn the ignition on. Continue holding until the service light resets.

What should I do if the check engine light comes on?

Ensure the gas cap is tightened. If the light persists, have the vehicle diagnosed by a qualified technician as soon as possible.

USER MANUAL Hardtop (2024) MINI

WELCOME TO MINI.

OWNER'S MANUAL.

Thank you for choosing a MINI.

The more familiar you are with the vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest the following:

Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. It contains important notes on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and traffic safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI.

Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

NOTES

Information....6

QUICK REFERENCE

Getting in.... 16

Set-up and use....20

On the road....24

AT A GLANCE

Dashboard....32

Central Information Display (CID)....36

Voice activation system....44

General settings....47

CONTROLS

Opening and closing....60

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel....80

Transporting children safely....91

Driving....97

Displays.... 122

Lights....145

Safety....151

Driving stability control systems....176

Driving comfort.... 181

Climate control....203

Interior equipment....212

Storage compartments....223

Cargo area....227

i DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving....234

Reducing fuel consumption....239

MOBILITY

Refueling....246

Fuel 248

Wheels and tires....250

Engine compartment....272

Engine oil....275

Coolant....279

Maintenance....281

Replacing components.... 283

Breakdown Assistance....289

Vehicle Care....297

REFERENCE

Technical data.... 302

Appendix....306

Everything from A to Z....308

Information

Using this Owner's Manual

Orientation

The fastest way to find information on a particular topic is by using the index.

For an overview of the vehicle, we recommend reading the quick reference guide in the owner's manual.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication

The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication is available as a printed book from an authorized service center.

The topics are also discussed in the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Media at a glance

General information

The contents of the Owner's Manual are available in various media formats. The following Owner's Manual media formats are available:

• Printed Owner's Manual.
• Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Printed Owner's Manual

The printed Owner's Manual describes all standard, country-specific, and optional equipment offered with the series.

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Principle

The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the control display.

Selecting the Owner's Manual

1. Press the button.
2. "My MINI"

3. "Owner's Manual"

4. Select the desired method of accessing the contents.

Scrolling through the Owner's Manual

Turn the Controller, until the next or previous contents are displayed.

Context help

General information

The section of the Owner's Manual relating to the function that is currently selected can be displayed directly.

Opening via Central Information Display (CID)

Change directly to the Options menu from the function on the control display:

1. Press the button.
2. "Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Control message is displayed

Directly from the Check Control message on the control display:

"Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual

To switch from a function, for instance radio, to the Owner's Manual on the control display and to alternate between the two displays:

1. Press the button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to the last displayed function.
5. Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last.

To alternate continuously between the last displayed function and the last displayed page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time.

Additional sources of information

Service center

An authorized service center will be glad to answer questions at any time.

Internet

Vehicle information and general information on MINI, e.g., on technology, are available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.

MINI Motorer's Guide app

The app specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The app can be displayed on smartphones and tablets.

MINI Motorer's Guide Web

Driver's Guide Web shows the most suitable information for the selected vehicle. If possible, only equipment and functions that are actually installed in the vehicle will be explained. Driver's Guide Web can be displayed in any current browser.

Icons and displays

Icons in the Owner's Manual

Icon Meaning

Precautions that must be followed in order to avoid the possibility of injury to yourself and to others as well as serious damage to the vehicle.

Measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

"..." Control Display texts used to select individual functions.

Icon Meaning

...< Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.

...« Responses generated by the voice activation system.

Action steps

Action steps to be carried out are presented as a numbered list. These steps must be carried out in the order shown.

1. First action step.
2. Second action step.

Bulletpoint lists

Items or actions without strict order or alternative options are shown as a bulletpoint list.

• First possibility.
• Second possibility.

Icons on vehicle parts

This symbol on a vehicle component indicates that further information on the component is available in the Owner's Manual.

Vehicle features and options

This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates features and functions that are not available in a vehicle, for example because of the selected optional equipment or the country-specific version.

This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

An authorized service center is happy to answer any questions that you may have about the features and options applicable to the vehicle.

Status of the Owner's Manual

Basic information

The manufacturer of the vehicle pursues a policy of constant development to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the features described in this Owner's Manual may deviate from those in the vehicle.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

For Your Own Safety

Intended use

Heed the following when using the vehicle:

• Owner's Manual.
• Information on the vehicle. Do not remove stickers.
• Technical vehicle data.

- The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the vehicle is driven.

- Vehicle documents and statutory documents.

Warranty

The vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration requirements applicable in the country of first delivery, also known as homologation. If the vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be necessary to adapt the vehicle to potentially differing operating conditions and registration requirements. Noncompliance with homologation requirements in a certain country may affect warranty coverage. Please consult the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Booklet for further information on warranty matters.

Maintenance and repairs

Advanced technology, for instance the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair work.

The vehicle manufacturer therefore recommends having necessary work performed by an authorized service center, e.g., a MINI dealer or service center. If a different repair shop is selected, MINI recommends selecting a workshop that performs the appropriate work such as maintenance and repair according to MINI specifications with properly trained personnel. In the Owner's Manual, such works are referred to as "another qualified authorized service center or repair shop".

If work is not carried out properly, for instance maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent damages and related safety risks.

Improperly performed work on the vehicle paintwork can lead to a failure or fault of components, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby result in a safety hazard.

Parts and accessories

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends the use of parts and accessory products approved by the manufacturer of the MINI.

Approved parts and accessories, and advice on their use and installation are available from an authorized service center.

MINI parts and accessories were tested by the manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.

The manufacturer of the vehicle warrants genuine MINI parts and accessories.

The manufacturer of the vehicle does not evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with MINI vehicles without presenting a safety hazard, even if a country-specific official approval was issued. The manufacturer of the vehicle does not evaluate whether these products are suitable for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.

California Proposition 65 Warning

For vehicles sold in California, the law requires vehicle manufacturers to provide the following warning:

Warning

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

Warning

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service the vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing the vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

Service and warranty

We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. The vehicle is covered by the following warranties:

• New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
  – Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
• Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
  – California Emission Control System Limited Warranty.

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Booklet.

The vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating conditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate the vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt the vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

Maintenance

Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for maintenance measures:

• MINI maintenance system
  Maintenance, refer to page 281.
• Maintenance Booklet, available online and accessible via a QR code in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Booklet.
• Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

If the vehicle is not maintained or is improperly maintained, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle.

A failure to maintain the vehicle or improper maintenance may affect your warranty coverage. Please consult the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Booklet for further information on warranty matters.

Refer to section on engine oil change regarding recommended service intervals for oil changes.

Data memory

General information

Electronic control devices are installed in the vehicle. Electronic control units process data they receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or exchange with each other. Some control units are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or provide assistance during driving, for instance driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control units facilitate comfort or infotainment functions.

Information about stored or exchanged data can be requested from the manufacturer of the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for example.

Personal reference

Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the country, the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehicle identification number, license plate and corresponding authorities. In addition, there are other options to track data collected in the vehicle to the driver or vehicle owner, for instance via utilized services.

Operating data in the vehicle

Control units process data to operate the vehicle.

For example, this includes:

• Status messages for the vehicle and its individual components, e.g., wheel RPM, wheel speed, deceleration, lateral acceleration, engaged seat belt indicator.
• Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain sensor signals.

The processed data is only processed in the vehicle itself while the vehicle is being operated. Data is not stored beyond the operating time.

Electronic components, e.g. control units and vehicle keys, contain components for storing technical information. Information about the vehicle condition, component usage, maintenance recommendations, events or faults can be stored temporarily or permanently.

This information generally documents the state of a component, a module, a system, or the surrounding area, for instance:

• Operating states of system components, such as fill levels, tire pressure, battery status.
• Malfunctions and faults in important system components, for instance lights and brakes.
• Responses by the vehicle to special driving situations such as airbag deployment or engagement of the driving stability control systems.
• Information on vehicle-damaging events.

The data is required to perform the control unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves to detect and correct malfunctions, and helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.

The majority of this data is stored temporarily and is only processed within the vehicle itself. In some circumstances the vehicle may store some data for an additional but limited period of time.

When servicing, for instance during repairs, service processes, warranty cases, and quality assurance measures, this technical information can be read out from the vehicle together with the vehicle identification number.

An authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop can read out the information. The diagnostic socket required by law in the vehicle is used to read out data.

The data is collected, processed, and used by the relevant organizations in the service network. The data documents technical conditions of the vehicle, which can be used to determine vehicle maintenance status, and facilitate quality improvement.

Vehicle fault and event memories can be reset by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop when performing repair or servicing work.

Data entry and data transfer into the vehicle

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort and individual settings can be stored in the vehicle and modified or reset at any time.

For example, this includes:

- Settings for the seat and steering wheel positions.

- Chassis and climate control settings.

If necessary, data can be transferred to the entertainment and communication system of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone.

This includes the following depending on the respective equipment:

• Multimedia data such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system.
• Address book data for use in conjunction with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system.
• Entered navigation destinations.
  – Data on the use of Internet services.

This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is found on a device that has been connected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at any time. This data is only transmitted to third parties upon personal request as part of the use of online services. The transmission depends on the selected settings for the use of the services.

Incorporation of mobile devices

Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile devices connected to the vehicle, for instance smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle control elements.

The sound and picture from the mobile devices can be played back and displayed through the multimedia system. Certain information is transferred to the mobile devices at the same time. Depending on the type of incorporation, this includes, for instance, position data and other general vehicle information. This optimizes the way in which selected apps, for instance navigation or music playback, work.

There is no further interaction between the mobile device and the vehicle, such as active access to vehicle data.

How the data will be processed further is determined by the provider of the particular app being used. The extent of the possible settings depends on the respective app and the operating system of the mobile device.

Services

General information

If the vehicle has a wireless network connection, it will enable data to be exchanged between the vehicle and other systems. The wireless network connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devices brought into the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This wireless network connection enables 'online functions' to be used. These include online services and apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.

Services from the vehicle manufacturer

Where online services from the vehicle manufacturer are concerned, the corresponding functions are described in the appropriate place, for instance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's web page. The relevant legal information pertaining to data protection may also be found on the manufacturer's website. Personal data may be used to perform online services. Data is exchanged over a secure connection, for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose.

Any collection, processing, and use of personal data above and beyond that needed to provide the services must always be based on a legal permission, contractual arrangement or consent. It is also possible to activate or deactivate the data connection as a whole. This excludes functions and services required by law such as Assist systems.

Services from other providers

When using online services from other providers, these services are the responsibility of the relevant provider and subject to their data privacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged during this process. Information on the way in which personal data is collected and used in relation to services from third parties, the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be obtained from the relevant service provider.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in the vehicle were operating.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger seat belts were fastened.
• How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

EDR data is recorded by the vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data, for instance name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Vehicle identification number

General information

Depending on the national-market equipment, the vehicle identification number is located in different positions in the vehicle. This chapter describes all possible positions for the series.

Engine compartment

The engraved vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

Right nameplate

For 3-door models:

The vehicle identification number can be found on the nameplate, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

For 5-door models:

The vehicle identification number can be found on the nameplate, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

Left nameplate

For 3-door models:

The vehicle identification number can be found on the nameplate, on the left-hand side of the vehicle.

For 5-door models:

The vehicle identification number can be found on the nameplate, on the left-hand side of the vehicle.

Windshield

The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers

The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that the vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone [phone].

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline [phone]. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

Getting in

Opening and closing

Buttons on the vehicle key

1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
4 Panic mode

Unlocking the vehicle

Press the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, either only the driver's door or all vehicle access points are unlocked.

If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points.

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

Locking the vehicle

Press the button on the vehicle key.

All vehicle access points are locked.

Buttons for the central locking system

Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

Pressing the button locks the vehicle if the front doors are closed.

Unlocking

Pressing the button unlocks the vehicle.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Comfort Access

Principle

The vehicle can be accessed without operating the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient.

The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key when it is in close proximity or in the interior.

Unlocking the vehicle

Press the button on the door handle of the driver's or front passenger door.

Locking the vehicle

Press the button on the door handle of the driver's or front passenger door.

Tailgate

Unlocking

- Unlock the vehicle and then press the button on the outer side of the tailgate.

- Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked.

Closing

Closing the tailgate manually.

Displays and control elements

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Low beams, fog lights

2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn signal

3 Instrument cluster

4 Window wiper system

Indicator/warning lights

The indicator/warning lights can illuminate in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and illuminate temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Driver's door

For 3-door models:

1 Power windows
2 Exterior mirrors

For 5-door models:

1 Safety switch
2 Power windows
3 Exterior mirrors

All around the selector lever

1 Selector lever
2 Controller with buttons
3 Parking brake, manual or electric

Central Information Display (CID)

Principle

The Central Information Display (CID) combines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

	Press once: calls up the main menu. Press twice: displays all menu items of the main menu.
	Call up the Communication menu.
	Call up the Media/Radio menu.
	Call up the destination input menu for navigation.
	Call up the CarPlay menu.
	Call up the navigation map.
	Press once: opens the previous display. Press and hold: open the menus used last.
	Call up the Options menu.

Voice control

Activating the voice control system

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

Wait for the signal tone.

Say the command.

This icon indicates that the voice action system is active.

If no other commands are available, operate the function via the Central Information Display (CID).

Ending the voice control system

Press the button on the steering wheel or >Cancel<.

Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Manually adjustable seats

1 Longitudinal direction
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt

Adjusting the head restraint

Height

• To raise: push the head restraint up.
• To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out

Adjusting the steering wheel

In four directions

1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seat position.
3. Fold the lever back up.

Entering the rear

1. Pull lever up to the stop.

1. Fold backrest forward.
2. Push the seat forward.

Original position

1. Push the seat back into the initial position.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.

Infotainment

Radio

Buttons and functions

Depending on the country and equipment version, the radio has the following buttons.

Button Function

Press: turns sound output on/off.

Turn: adjusts the volume.

Change the entertainment source.

Press once: changes the station/track.

Press and hold: fast forward/re-wind the track.

Button Function

Programmable memory buttons.

Changeover of wave range/satellite radio.

Navigation destination input

Entering a destination via address

State/province

1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. "State/Province?"
4. Select the country from the list.

Entering the address

The address can be entered in any order.

Example: entering the address via the town/city

1. "City/Postal code?"
2. Enter the town/city.

The list is narrowed down further with each entry.

1. Select the icon.
2. Select a town/city from the list.
3. If necessary, enter the street.
4. Select the street as you would the town/city.
5. If necessary, enter a house number.
6. Select the icon.
7. Select a house number or range of house numbers from the list.

Starting destination guidance

"Start guidance"

Destination guidance is started to the town/city center if no street is entered.

Pairing the mobile phone

After the mobile phone is paired once with the vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using the Central Information Display (CID), the steering wheel buttons and spoken instructions.

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the control display.

1. Select the functions for which the mobile phone is to be used.
2. To perform additional functions with your mobile phone, e.g., to search for/connect a Bluetooth device or new device, please refer to your mobile phone's operating instructions.

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is shown on your mobile phone's display. Select the vehicle's Bluetooth name.

1. Depending on the mobile device, a control number is displayed or the control number must be entered.

2. Compare the control number displayed on the control display with the control number displayed on the mobile device. Confirm the control number on the device and on the control display.

3. Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed in the device list.

Using the telephone

Accepting a call

Incoming call can be accepted via the Central Information Display (CID) or the button on the steering wheel.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

"Accept"

Via the button on the steering wheel

Press the button.

Via the instrument cluster

Use the OK button on the steering wheel to select: "Accept"

Dialing a number

1. Communication"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the numbers individually.
4. Select the icon.

Establish the connection via the additional telephone:

1. Press the button.
2. "Call via"

Apple CarPlay preparation

Principle

CarPlay allows select functions of a compatible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice control and the on-board monitor.

Functional requirements

• Compatible iPhone: iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
• Corresponding mobile contract.

• Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, and Siri voice control are activated on the iPhone.

• If necessary, the setting for mobile data must be activated on the iPhone.

• Wi-Fi and Bluetooth are enabled in the vehicle.

Turning on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"

5. Select the following settings:

6. "Bluetooth®"

7. "Apple CarPlay"

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.

Select CarPlay as the function:

◀ "Apple CarPlay"

The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list.

On the road

Driving

Starting and stopping the engine

Ignition on/off

- On: press the Start/Stop button.

Most of the indicator/warning lights illuminate for a varied length of time.

- Off: press the Start/Stop button again.

All indicator lights turn off.

- Radio-ready state: when the ignition is switched off, press the ON/OFF button on the radio or when the engine is running, press the Start/Stop button.

Some electrical components remain ready for operation.

Start/stop engine

Manual transmission: starting

1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to Neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Steptronic transmission: starting

1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: switching off

1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.

Steptronic transmission: switching off

1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the parking brake.
2. Engage selector lever position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Auto Start/Stop function

Manual transmission: switches the engine off automatically while stationary to save fuel. As soon as the clutch pedal is depressed, the engine starts automatically.

Steptronic transmission: switches the engine off automatically while stationary to save fuel. The engine starts automatically when the brake pedal is released.

Parking brake

Apply manual parking brake

The lever automatically engages after being pulled up.

Releasing

Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide the lever down.

Set the electrical parking brake

Pull the switch when the vehicle is stationary.

The LED and indicator illuminate.

Releasing

Manual transmission: press the switch while the brake pedal is depressed.

Steptronic transmission: press the switch while the brake is depressed or selector lever position P is set.

The LED and indicator light turn off.

The parking brake is released.

Manual transmission

Shifting

When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push the gearshift lever to the right in order to prevent inadvertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear.

Reverse gear

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

To overcome the resistance push the gear-shift lever dynamically to the left and engage reverse gear with a forward shifting movement.

Steptronic transmission

Selector lever positions

Parking position P.

Reverse R.

Neutral N.

Gear position D.

Engage selector lever position P or R only when the vehicle is stationary.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear position or reverse, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to drive off.

Selector lever lock

A lock prevents an inadvertent change from selector lever position P to another selector lever position and, depending on the transmission version, inadvertent switching to selector lever position P or R.

To release the lock: with the brake pedal depressed, press the button on the side of the selector lever.

Steptronic transmission, Sport and manual mode

Sport program:

Press the selector lever to the left from selector lever position D.

Manual mode:

• Downshifting: press the selector lever forward.
• Upshifting: pull the selector lever rearwards.

Turn signal, high beams, headlight flasher, roadside parking lights

Turn signal

• Flashing: press the lever past the resistance point.
• Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the lever up or down.
• Brief flashing: press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flashing.

High beams, headlight flasher

Press the lever forward or pull it backward.

- High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams illuminate when the low beams are switched on.

- High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Canada: roadside parking light

To illuminate the vehicle on one side.

• On: with the radio-ready state switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.
• Off: briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Lights and lighting

Lighting functions

Icon Function

Bad weather light.

Automatic headlight control.

Cornering light.

Lights off.

Daytime driving lights.

Parking lights.

Instrument lighting.

Window wiper system

Turning the wipers on/off and flick wipe

Turning on

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached.

• Resting position of the wipers: position 0.
• Rain sensor: position 1.
• Normal wiper speed: position 2.
• Fast wiper speed: position 3.

Turning off and flick wipe

Press the lever down.

• Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its basic setting.
• Flick wipe: press the lever down from the basic setting.

Rain sensor

Activate/deactivate

To activate: press the lever up once from its basic setting, arrow 1.

To deactivate: press the lever back into the basic setting.

Set interval period or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Canada: window wiper system

Turning the wipers on/off and flick wipe

Turning on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance point.

• Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
• Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point.

Turning off and flick wipe

Press the lever down.

• To turn off fast wipe: press down twice.
• To turn off normal wipe: press down once.
• Flick wipe: press down once.

Rain sensor

Activate/deactivate

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Set interval period or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Climate control

Air conditioning system

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Air recirculation mode.

Adjusts the air flow, manual.

Adjusts the air distribution manually.

Heated windshield.

Automatic climate control

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Maximum cooling.

Button Function

AUTO program.

Air recirculation mode.

Adjusts the air flow, manual.

Air distribution, manual.

Defrosts and defogs the windows.

Heated windshield.

Rear window defroster.

Refueling stop

Refueling

Fuel cap

1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge and open it.

1. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

2. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

Gasoline

For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without metallic additives.

Information on the recommended gasoline quality can be found in the Owner's Manual.

Wheels and tires

Tire pressure specifications

For 5-door models:

The tire inflation pressure values can be found on the sign on the door pillar.

For 3-door models:

The tire inflation pressure values can be found on the sign on the door pillar.

Checking the tire pressure

Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and correct it as needed:

• At least twice a month.
• Before embarking on an extended trip.

After correcting the tire pressure

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Monitor the tire pressure.

Electronic oil measurement

Prerequisites

A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed.

Displaying the engine oil level

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

Adding engine oil

General information

Turn off the ignition and safely park the vehicle before engine oil is added.

Adding engine oil

Only add engine oil when the message is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Observe the top-up quantity in the message.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Observe recommended engine oil types.

Providing assistance

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the control display.

Breakdown Assistance

MINI Roadside Assistance

This service can be reached around the clock in many countries.

1. MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the MINI Roadside Assistance is established.

A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.

Dashboard

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily avail-

able in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows 75
2 Exterior mirror adjustment button 87
3 Buttons of the central locking system 65

4 Lights

Bad weather light 148

Light switch 145

Lights off

Daytime driving lights 147

Parking lights 145

Low beams 145

Automatic headlight control 146

Cornering light 147

Automatic High Beam Assistant 147

Instrument lighting 149

5 Steering wheel buttons, left

Camera-based cruise control on/off 181

Cruise Control on/off 189

Speed Limiter 172

Interrupting, continuing cruise control

Cruise control: increase speed

Cruise control: reduce speed

Camera-based cruise control: reduce distance

Camera-based cruise control: increase distance

6 Pitman arm, left

Turn signal 105

High beams, headlight flasher 105

Automatic High Beam Assistant 147

Roadside parking lights 146

On-board computer 136

7 Instrument cluster 122

8 Pitman arm, right

Wipers 106

Wiper on Canadian models 110

Rain sensor 107

Rain sensor on Canadian models 110

Cleaning windows 108

Rear wiper in Canadian models 108

Rear wiper 108

Clean the rear window 108

9 Steering wheel buttons, right

Voice control 44

Telephone

Confirm the selection 135

Move selection up 135

Move selection down 135

Increase volume

Reduce volume

10 Horn, entire surface

11 Steering wheel heating 89
12 Adjusting the steering wheel 89
13 Unlocking the hood 273
14 Depending on the equipment: using tailgate 68

In the vicinity of the center console

1 Hazard warning system 289

Intelligent Safety 162

2 Control display 36
3 Radio/Multimedia
4 Glove compartment 223
5 Climate control 203

6 PDC Park Distance Control

191

Rearview camera 195

Automatic Parking Assistant 198

Auto Start/Stop function 100

Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off 97

Dynamic Stability Control 176

MINI Driving Modes switch 178

Steptronic transmission selector lever 115

8 Controller with buttons 39

9 Parking brake, manual 103

Parking brake, electric 103

7 Manual transmission gearshift lever 114

In the vicinity of the headliner

Central Information Display (CID)

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Principle

The Central Information Display (CID) combines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Input and display

Main menu

General information

The main menu is divided into two areas. The left area contains menu items that can be used to call up all functions from the on-board monitor. The menu items in the right area show dynamic contents that enable quick access to certain functions.

Media/Radio

All functions of the entertainment system, for instance radio stations or pairing with external devices.

Communication

Telephone and message function, e-mail and calendar and connecting and managing mobile devices, for instance smartphones.

Navigation

Access to the navigation system, destination input and traffic bulletins. Configurable map views and other functions, such as points of interest.

My MINI

Information on vehicle status and setting options for vehicle and on-board monitor. Access to the Integrated Owner's Manual.

MINI Connected

Access to apps and vehicle functions. Additional apps and vehicle functions can be purchased from the MINI Connected Store.

Notifications

Access to all incoming messages in the vehicle, for instance Check Control messages.

Letters and numbers

Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering upper and lower case letters, numbers and characters:

Icon Function

abc

ABC

ange between capital and lower-case letters.

L

Insert blank space.

[Non-Text]

Use voice control.

OK

Confirm entry.

Without navigation system

@ ^A

A^a

a@

Select the icon.

Entry comparison

When entering names and addresses, the choice is narrowed down with every letter entered and letters may be added automatically.

Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle.

• Only those letters are offered during entry for which data is available.
• Destination search: place names can be entered in all languages that are available on the control display.

Activating/deactivating the functions

Several menu items are preceded by a checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether the function is activated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.

□√

Function is activated.

□

Function is deactivated.

Status information

General information

The status field can be found in the upper area of the control display. Status information is displayed in the form of icons.

Radio

Icon Meaning

HD

HD Radio station is being received.

sxm

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone

Icon Meaning

[NO TEXT]

Incoming or outgoing call.

X

Missed call.

[Non-Text]

Signal strength of mobile phone network.

Icon flashes: network search.

.

Mobile phone network is not available.

▲

Roaming is active.

...

SMS text message received.

[NO TEXT]

Message received.

Icon Meaning

Reminder.

Sending not possible.

Entertainment

Icon Meaning

Bluetooth audio.

USB audio interface.

Mobile phone audio interface.

Apple CarPlay.

Other icons

Icon Meaning

Check Control message.

The sound output has been switched off.

Encrypted connection not active.

Request for the current vehicle position.

Checking the current vehicle position.

Split screen

General information

Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, for instance information from the on-board computer.

In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when changing to another menu.

Switching the split screen on/off

ess the button.

1. "Split screen"

Selecting the display

The display can be selected in menus which support the split screen function.

1. Tilt the Controller to the right until the split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. Select the desired setting.

Specifying the number of displays

It is possible to specify the number of displays.

1. Tilt the Controller to the right until the split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. Tilt the Controller to the left.

Control elements

Overview

1 Control display
2 Controller

Control display

General information

To clean the control display, follow the vehicle care instructions, refer to page 301.

In the case of very high temperatures on the control display, for instance due to intense solar radiation, the brightness may be reduced down to complete deactivation. Once the temperature is reduced, for instance through shade or air conditioning system, the normal functions are restored.

Safety information

Warning

Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable, such as mobile phones or loose objects, can be thrown through the vehicle interior while driving, such as in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices that are connected to the vehicle via a cable.

Warning

Objects in the area in the front of the control display can slip and damage the control display. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not place objects in the area in front of the control display.

Switching on/off automatically

The control display is switched on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the control display is needed for operation.

In certain situations, the control display is switched off automatically, for instance if

no operation is performed on the vehicle for several minutes.

Switching on/off manually

The control display can also be switched off manually.

1. Press the button.

2. "Turn off control display"

Press the Controller or any button on the Controller to switch it back on again.

Controller

General information

The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings.

Operation

- Turn to switch between menu items, for example.

- Press to select a menu item, for example.

- With navigation system: tilt in four directions to switch between displays, for example.

- Without navigation system: tilt in two directions to switch between displays, for example.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

MENU	Press once: calls up the main menu. Press twice: displays all menu items of the main menu.
COM	With navigation system: opens the Communication menu.
MEDIA	With navigation system: opens the Media/Radio menu.
AUDIO	Without navigation system: open the Audio menu.
TEL	Without navigation system: opens the Telephone menu.

Button Function

NAV	With navigation system: opens destination input menu for navigation.
	Call up the CarPlay menu.
MAP	With navigation system: opens navigation map.
	Without navigation system: call up the CarPlay map.
BACK	Press once: opens the previous display.
	Press and hold: open the menus used last.
OPTION	Call up the Options menu.

Operating via the Controller

Opening the main menu

Press the button.

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) functions can be called up via the main menu.

Adjusting the main menu

1. Press the button twice.

All menu items of the main menu are displayed.

1. Select a menu item.
2. To move the menu item to the desired position, tilt the Controller to the right or left.

Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.

Adjusting menu contents

The display of menus "Media/Radio",

"Communication" and "MINI Connected" can be adjusted, for instance to remove the entries of functions that are not used from the menu.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. Select the menu.
2. "Personalize menu"
3. Select desired menu contents to be displayed.

Dynamic contents

You can display dynamic contents within the menu items. The contents of the menu items update automatically, e.g., the active destination guidance in the navigation.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Contents of main menu"

Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, for instance "System settings", a new display appears.

- Tilt the Controller to the left.

The current display closes and the previous display is shown.

s the button.

The previous display re-opens.

- Tilt the Controller to the right.

The new display opens.

An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened.

Opening recently used menus

The recently used menus can be displayed.

The recently used menus are displayed.

Going to the Options menu

Press the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

The menu consists of various areas, for instance:

• "Split screen": screen settings.
• "Media/Radio": control options for the selected main menu.
• "Save station": if applicable, further control options for the selected menu.

Entering letters and numbers

Input

1. Turn the Controller: select letters or numbers.
2. OK confirm entry.

Deleting

Icon Function

Press the Controller: delete letters or number.

Hold the Controller down: delete all letters or numbers.

Using alphabetical lists

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, the letters for which there is an entry are displayed at the left edge.

1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.

All letters for which there are entries are displayed on the left edge.

1. Select the first letter of the desired entry.

The first entry of the selected letter is displayed.

Operation via touchscreen

General information

Depending on the equipment version, the control display is equipped with a touchscreen.

Touch the touchscreen with your fingers. Do not use any objects.

Opening the main menu

Tap on the icon.

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) functions can be called up via the main menu.

Adjusting the main menu

1. Tap on the icon.

2. Drag the menu item to the desired position on the right or left.

Selecting menu items

Tap the desired menu item.

Dynamic contents

You can display dynamic contents within the menu items. The contents of the menu items update automatically, e.g., the active destination guidance in the navigation.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Contents of main menu"

Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, a new display opens.

An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened.

- Swipe to the left.

- Tap arrow.

The new display opens.

Entering letters and numbers

Input

1. Tap the icon on the touchscreen.
   A keyboard is displayed on the control display.
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.

Deleting

Icon Function

|←	Tapping the icon: deletes the letter or number.
|←	Tapping and holding the icon all letters: deletes all letters or numbers.

Operating navigation map

The navigation map can be moved using the touchscreen.

Function Operation

Enlarge/shrink map.

Drag in or out with the fingers.

Programmable memory buttons

General information

The Central Information Display (CID) functions can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly, for instance radio stations, navigation destinations, phone numbers and menu entries.

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

Storing a function

1. Select the function via the Central Information Display (CID).
2. Press and hold the desired button, until a signal sounds.

Executing a function

1...6 Press the button. The function will work immediately.

This means for instance that the connection is established when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the key assignment

Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects.

The assignment of the buttons is displayed in the upper area of the control display.

Deleting the button assignments

1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds.

2. "OK"

Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Principle

Most functions displayed on the control display can be operated by voice commands via the voice activation system. The system supports you with announcements during input.

General information

• Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary can only be operated via the voice activation system to a limited extent.
• The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side.
  ->...< in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.

Functional requirements

- A language must be set via the control display that is supported by the voice

activation system. To set the language, refer to page 47.

- Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.

Using the voice activation system

Activating the voice control system

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

Wait for the signal tone.

Say the command.

This icon indicates that the voice activation system is active.

No other commands may be available. In this case, operate the function via the Central Information Display (CID).

Ending the voice control system

Press the button on the steering wheel or >Cancel<.

Possible commands

General information

Most menu items on the control display can be spoken as commands.

Commands from other menus can also be spoken.

You can also select list entries such as phone list entries via the voice activation system. Read these list entries out loud exactly as they are shown in the respective list.

Displaying possible commands

The following is displayed in the top area of the control display:

• Some possible commands for the current menu.
• Some possible commands from other menus.
• Status of the speech recognition.
• Encrypted connection is not available.

Help on the voice activation system

• General information on voice control<: have information on the operating principle of the voice activation system read out loud.
  ->Help<: have help for the current menu read out loud.

Example: going to the sound settings

The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the Controller.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output, if needed.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. Media and radio<

4. Tone<

Settings

Setting the voice control

You can set the system to use standard dialog or a short version.

The short version of the voice control plays back short messages in abbreviated form. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speech mode:"
5. Select the desired setting.

Activating speech recognition via the server

The speech recognition feature via the server provides a dictation function and a natural method of destination input while improving the quality of voice recognition. To use the functions, data is transmitted to a service provider via an encrypted connection and stored locally there.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Server speech recognition"

Adjusting the volume

Turn the volume button during the voice guidance until the desired volume is set.

• The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed.
• The volume is stored for the profile currently used.

Information on Emergency Requests

Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful

situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a telephone connection.

Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 290, close to the interior mirror.

System limits

• Certain noises can be detected and may lead to problems. Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof closed.
• Noises from the front passenger or the rear seat bench can impair the system. Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
• Major language dialects can cause problems with the speech recognition feature. Speak loud and clear.

Using the voice activation system of the smartphone

A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be used via voice control.

Activate voice command response on the smartphone for this purpose.

1. Press
   Press and hold the button on the steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
   Voice command response is activated on the smartphone.

2. Release the button.

If activation is successful, a confirmation appears on the control display.

If it was not possible to activate voice command response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears on the control display.

General settings

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Language

Adjusting the language

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. If necessary, "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Time

Setting the time zone

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes are displayed.
8. Press the Controller.

Setting the time format

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Date

Setting the date

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Date:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Make the settings for the month and year.

Setting the date format

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the units of measurement

You can set the units of measurement for some values, for example, consumption, distances and temperature.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Activating/deactivating the display of the current vehicle position

Principle

If vehicle tracking has been activated, the current vehicle position can be displayed in the MINI app.

Activating/deactivating

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Data privacy"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
5. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating pop-ups

For some functions, pop-ups are displayed automatically on the control display. Some of these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Pop-ups"
4. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Control display

Brightness

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Depending on the light conditions, the brightness control may not be clearly visible.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: color world

Principle

The display of the display content can be configured individually, for instance in a harmonic color style.

General information

The setting of the color world effects the following display content:

• On-board monitor.
• Instrument cluster.
• Head-up display.

Depending on the equipment, the color world can be applied as basic display for the LED ring on the central instrument.

LED ring on the central instrument cluster, refer to page 140.

Setting the color world

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Color scheme"
5. Select the desired setting.

Notifications

Principle

The menu centrally displays all messages arriving in the vehicle in list form.

General information

The following messages can be displayed:

• Traffic messages.
• Communication messages, for example e-mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
• Check Control messages.
• Messages on service notifications.
• Messages from the vehicle manufacturer.

Notifications are additionally displayed in the status field.

Retrieving notifications

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"
2. Select the desired notification.

The menu in which the notification is displayed will open.

Deleting notifications

Notifications can be deleted from the list.

Sustained Check Control messages or messages from the vehicle manufacturer with important customer information are displayed as long as they are relevant.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"
2. Select the desired notification.
3. Press the button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all notifications"

Settings

The following settings can be adjusted:

• Select the applications, from which notifications will be permitted.
• Sort the notifications according to date or priority.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting.

Data protection

Data transfer

Principle

The vehicle offers various functions which require data to be transferred to MINI or a service provider. The data transfer can be deactivated for some functions.

General information

With data transfer deactivated, the respective function cannot be used.

Only make these settings while stationary.

Activate/deactivate

Follow the instructions on the control display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Data privacy"
4. Select the desired setting.

Deleting personal data in the vehicle

Principle

Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores personal data, such as stored radio stations.

This personal data can be permanently deleted via the Central Information Display (CID).

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data is deleted:

• Driver profile settings.
• Stored radio stations.
• Stored programmable memory buttons.
• Trip computer and on-board computer information.
• Music collection.
• Navigation, for instance stored destinations.
• Phone book.
• Office data, for instance voice memos.
• Login accounts.

Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 15 minutes.

Functional requirement

Data can only be deleted while stationary.

Deleting data

Note and follow the instructions on the control display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Data privacy"
4. "Delete personal data"
5. "Delete personal data"
6. "OK"
7. Exit and lock the vehicle.

The deletion process takes 15 minutes to complete.

If not all data was deleted, repeat the deletion.

Canceling deletion

Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data.

Connections

Principle

Various connection types are available for using mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection type to select depends on the mobile device and the desired function.

General information

The following overview shows possible functions and the suitable connection types for them. The range of functions depends on the mobile device.

Function Connec- tion type
Making calls via the hands-free system. Using phone functions via the Central Information Dis-play (CID). Using the smartphone Of- fice functions.	Bluetooth.
Playing music from the smartphone or the audio player.	Bluetooth or USB.
Using compatible apps via the Central Information Dis-play (CID).	Bluetooth or USB.
USB storage device: Exporting and importing driver profiles. Update the software. Playing music.	USB.
Playing videos from the smartphone or the USB de-vice.	USB.
Using Apple CarPlay apps via the Central Information Display (CID) and voice op-eration.	Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.

The following connection types require one-time pairing with the vehicle:

• Bluetooth.
• Apple CarPlay.

Paired devices are automatically recognized later on and connected to the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Compatible devices

General information

Information on compatible mobile devices is available as follows:

• On the MINI homepage.
• Via Hotline/Customer Support
• At an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number

With a search for compatible devices, you may have to state the vehicle identification number and the software part number. These numbers can be displayed in the vehicle.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"

A software update, refer to page 57, can be performed.

Bluetooth connection

Functional requirements

• Compatible device, refer to page 52, with Bluetooth interface.
• The vehicle key is in the vehicle.
• The device is ready for operation.
• Bluetooth is activated on the device and in the vehicle, refer to page 52.
• Bluetooth default settings, such as for visibility, may be required on device; refer to your device operating instructions.

Switching on Bluetooth

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"

Activating/deactivating telephone functions

To use all supported functions of a mobile phone, the following functions must be activated prior to pairing.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the desired setting:

6. "Office"

Activate function to transmit short messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, memos, and reminders to the vehi-

cle. Costs can be incurred by transmitting all data to the vehicle.

- "Contact images"

Activate function to show the contact pictures.

Pairing the mobile device with the vehicle

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"

5. Select the functions for which the device will be used:

6. "Telephone"

7. "Bluetooth® audio"
8. "Apps"
9. "Apple CarPlay"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the control display.

1. On your mobile device, search for nearby Bluetooth devices.

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is shown on your mobile device's display.

Select the vehicle's Bluetooth name.

1. Depending on the mobile device, a control number is displayed or the control number must be entered.

- Compare the control number displayed on the control display with the control number displayed on the mobile device.

Confirm the control number on the device and on the control display.

- Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed in the device list.

If connection was not successful: Frequently Asked Questions, refer to page 53.

Frequently Asked Questions

All prerequisites are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as expected.

In this case, the following explanations can help:

Why could the mobile phone not be paired or connected?

- There are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone or vehicle.

In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections to other devices.

Delete all known Bluetooth connections from the mobile phone's device list and start a new device search.

- The mobile phone is in power-save mode or has only a limited remaining battery life.

Charge the mobile phone.

Why does the mobile phone no longer react?

- The applications on the mobile phone do not function anymore.

Switch the mobile phone off and on again.

- Possibly too high or too low ambient temperatures for mobile phone operation.

Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme ambient temperatures.

Why can phone functions not be used via the Central Information Display (CID)?

- The mobile phone may not be configured correctly, for example, as a Bluetooth audio device.

Connect the mobile phone with the telephone or additional telephone function.

Why are no or not all telephone book entries displayed or why are they incomplete?

- Transmission of the telephone book entries is not yet complete.

- It is possible that only the telephone book entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted.

- It may not be possible to display telephone book entries with special characters.

- It may not be possible to transmit contacts from social networks.

- The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.

– Data volume of the contact too large, for instance due to stored information such as memos.

Reduce the data volume of the contact.

- A mobile phone is only connected as an audio source.

Reconfigure the mobile phone and connect it with the telephone or additional telephone function.

How can the telephone connection quality be improved?

- Depending on mobile phone, it may be possible to adjust the Bluetooth signal strength on your mobile phone.

- Insert the mobile phone into the wireless charging tray.

- Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately.

If all points listed have been checked and the required function is still not available: contact the hotline, an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

USB connection

General information

The following mobile devices can be connected to the USB port:

- Mobile phones.

- Audio devices with USB port, for instance MP3 players.

- USB storage devices.

Common file systems are supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended formats.

A connected USB device will be supplied with charge current via the USB port if the device supports this. Follow the maximum charge current of the USB port.

The following uses are possible on USB ports with data transfer:

- Exporting and importing driver profiles, refer to page 69.

- Playing music files via USB audio.

- Playing videos via USB video.

- Loading of software updates, refer to page 57.

Follow the following when connecting:

- Do not use force when plugging the connector into the USB port.

- Use a flexible adapter cable.

- Protect the USB device against mechanical damage.

- Due to the large number of USB devices available on the market, it cannot be guaranteed that every device is operable on the vehicle.

- Do not expose USB devices to extreme environmental conditions, such as very high temperatures; refer to the operating instructions of the device.

• Due to the many different compression techniques, proper playback of the media stored on the USB device cannot be guaranteed in all cases.
• To ensure proper transmission of the stored data, do not charge a USB device via the onboard socket, when it is connected to the USB port.
• Depending on how the USB device is being used, settings may be required on the USB storage device, refer to the operating instructions of the device.

Not compatible USB devices:

• USB hard drives.
• USB hubs.
• USB memory card readers with multiple slots.
• HFS-formatted USB devices.
• Devices such as fans or bulbs.

Functional requirement

Compatible device, refer to page 52, with USB port.

Connecting the device

Connect the USB device using a suitable adapter cable to a USB port, refer to page 218.

The USB device is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list.

Apple CarPlay©

Principle

CarPlay allows select functions of a compatible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice control and the on-board monitor.

Functional requirements

- iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.

Compatible iPhone, refer to page 52.

• Corresponding mobile contract.
• Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, and Siri voice control are activated on the iPhone.
• If necessary, the setting for mobile data must be activated on the iPhone.
• Wi-Fi and Bluetooth are enabled in the vehicle.

Turning on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"

5. Select the following settings:

6. "Bluetooth®"

7. "Apple CarPlay"

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

Pairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer to page 53, via Bluetooth

Select CarPlay as the function:

◀ "Apple CarPlay"

The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list, refer to page 56.

Operation

For more information, refer to the Integrated Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication.

Frequently Asked Questions

All prerequisites are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as expected.

In this case, the following explanations can help:

The iPhone has already been paired with Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is set up, CarPlay can no longer be selected.

• Delete the iPhone concerned from the device list.
• On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned from the list of stored vehicles under Bluetooth and under Wi-Fi.
• Pair the iPhone as a new device.

If the steps listed have been carried out and the required function is still not available: contact the hotline, an authorized service center, or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Managing mobile devices

General information

• After one-time pairing, the devices are automatically recognized and reconnected when the ignition is switched on.
• The data stored on the SIM card or in the mobile phone is transferred to the vehicle after recognition.
• For some devices, certain settings may be necessary, for instance authorization, see operating instructions of the device.

Displaying the device list

All devices paired and/or connected with the vehicle are displayed in the device list.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"

An icon indicates, for which function a device is used.

Icon Function
	"Telephone"
	"Additional telephone"
	"Bluetooth® audio"
	"Apps"
	"Apple CarPlay"

Configuring the device

Functions can be activated or deactivated for paired and connected devices.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
5. Select the desired setting.

If a function is assigned to a device, the function will be deactivated where appropriate for a device that is already connected and the device will be disconnected.

Disconnecting the device

The device's connection to the vehicle is disconnected.

The device remains paired and can be connected again, refer to page 56.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device"

Connecting the device

A disconnected device can be reconnected.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Connect device"

The functions that were assigned to the device before disconnecting are assigned to the device when it is reconnected. The functions may be deactivated on a device already connected.

Deleting the device

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"

The device is disconnected and removed from the device list.

Swapping the telephone and additional telephone

If two mobile phones are connected to the vehicle, the functions of the telephone and additional telephone can be switched.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."

Software update

General information

The vehicle supports a large number of mobile devices, for instance mobile phones and MP3 players. Software updates are available for many of the supported devices. The vehicle is kept up-to-date via regular vehicle software updates.

For information on available software updates, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Displaying the version of the installed software

The software version installed in the vehicle is displayed.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Show current version"

If an update has been carried out before, select the desired version to display additional information.

Updating software via USB

The software may only be updated when the vehicle is stationary.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. Store the file for the software update in the main folder of a USB device.
2. Connecting USB device to the USB port.
3. "My MINI"
4. "System settings"
5. "Software update"
6. "Update software"

7. "USB"

8. "Install software"

9. "OK"
10. Wait for the update to complete.
11. Confirm system restart.

Restoring the software version

You can restore the software to the version prior to the last update or to its factory settings.

The software may only be restored when the vehicle is stationary.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5. • "Previous version"

The previous software version is restored.

- "Default software settings"

The first software version is restored.

1. "Remove software"
2. "OK"
3. Wait for software restore.
4. Confirm system restart.

Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Vehicle key

General information

Two vehicle keys are included in the scope of delivery, each containing an integrated key.

Each vehicle key contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 63.

Depending on the equipment and country version, various settings, refer to page 72, can be configured for the button functions.

A personal driver profile, refer to page 69, for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle.

To provide information on maintenance recommendations, the service data is stored in the vehicle key, refer to page 281.

To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle key has a button cell battery. Batteries or button cell batteries can be swallowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries within two hours, for example due to internal burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key and batteries out of reach of children. Immediately seek medical help if there is any suspicion that a battery or button cell battery has been swallowed or is located in any part of the body.

Warning

People or animals in the vehicle can lock the doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions:

• Pressing the Start/Stop button.
• Releasing the parking brake.
• Opening and closing the doors or windows.
• Engaging selector lever position N.
• Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Overview

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlocking the tailgate

4 Panic mode

Unlocking

Press the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, refer to page 72, the following access points are unlocked.

- Driver's door and fuel filler flap.

Press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points.

- All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.

In addition, the following functions are executed:

- Unlocking is confirmed by the turn signals and the horn. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 72.

- The settings stored in the driver profile, refer to page 69, are applied.

- The interior lights, refer to page 149, and the MINI logo projection are switched on, provided that the interior lights were not switched off manually.

- Depending on the settings, the welcome light and pathway lighting, refer to page 146, are switched on.

- The alarm system, refer to page 73, is switched off.

The lighting functions may depend on the ambient brightness.

Convenient opening

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

Locking

1. Close the driver's door.

2. Press the button on the vehicle key.

The following functions are executed:

• All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are locked.
• Locking is confirmed by the turn signals and the horn. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 72.
• The alarm system, refer to page 73, is switched on.

If the engine or ignition is still switched on when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks twice. In this case, the engine or ignition must be switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.

With Comfort Access: convenient closing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key in close range to the vehicle.

The windows and the glass sunroof are closed, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

Switch on interior lights and courtesy lights

Press the button on the vehicle key with the vehicle locked.

The MINI logo projection is also switched on.

These functions are not available if the interior lights were switched off manually.

The lighting functions may depend on the ambient brightness.

After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing the button again.

Tailgate

General information

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, it is possible to specify

whether the tailgate can be unlocked with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings, refer to page 72.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the travel path of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

Warning

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the travel path of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

Warning

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heating elements while driving. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Opening

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

- Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds.

- Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Replacing the battery

NOTICE

Improper batteries in a battery-operated device can damage the device. There is a risk of damage to property. Always replace the discharged battery with a battery with the same voltage, the same size and the same specification.

1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle key, refer to page 65.

2. Slide the integrated key into the opening and raise the cover.

The battery compartment is accessible.

1. Slide the integrated key in the cover of the battery compartment and raise the cover.

1. Push battery in arrow direction using a pointed object and lift it out.

1. Insert a type CR 2032 3V battery with the positive side facing up.

2. Insert lid and cover.

3. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key until it engages.

Have old batteries disposed of by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or reop, or take them to a collection point.

Additional vehicle keys

Additional vehicle keys are available from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Loss of vehicle keys

A lost vehicle key can be disabled and replaced by an authorized service center or

another qualified service center or repair shop.

Malfunction

General information

A Check Control message is displayed.

Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances:

• The battery of the vehicle key is discharged. For replacing the battery, refer to page 63.
• Fault of the radio link from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.

- Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal objects.

Do not transport the vehicle key together with metal objects.

- Fault of the radio link from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehicle key.

Do not carry the vehicle key in close proximity to other electronic devices.

- Fault of radio transmission by a charging process of mobile devices, for instance charging of a mobile phone.

- The vehicle key is in direct proximity of the wireless charging tray.

Place the vehicle key in a different location.

In the case of interference, the vehicle can be unlocked and locked from the outside with the integrated key, refer to page 65.

Starting the engine via emergency detection of the Vehicle key

It is not possible to start the engine if the vehicle key has not been detected.

Proceed as follows in this case:

1. Hold the vehicle key against the mark on the steering column as shown. Pay attention to the display in the instrument cluster.

2. If the vehicle key is detected:

Start the engine within 10 seconds.

If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly change the position of the vehicle key and repeat the procedure.

Frequently Asked Questions

What precautions can be taken to be able to open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in the vehicle key?

- The options provided by the Remote Services of the MINI Connected app include the ability to lock and unlock a vehicle.

This requires an active MINI Connected contract and the MINI Connected app must be installed on a smartphone.

- Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via the MINI Connected Call Center.

An active MINI Connected contract is required.

Integrated key

General information

The driver's door can be locked and unlocked without the vehicle key using the integrated key.

Safety information

NOTICE

The door lock is permanently joined with the door. The door handle can be moved. When pulling the door handle with the integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Remove the integrated key before pulling the external door handle.

Removing

Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the integrated key, arrow 2.

Locking/unlocking via the door lock

1. Remove cover cap on the door lock.

To do this, slide the integrated key into the opening to the stop from below and remove the cover cap.

1. Unlock or lock the door lock using the integrated key.

The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside.

Alarm system

The alarm system is not switched on if the vehicle is locked with the integrated key.

The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the door lock.

Buttons for the central locking system

General information

In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on.

Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

Press the button with the front doors closed.

• The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
• The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking.

Unlocking

Press the button.

Opening

utton to unlock the ogether, and then pull the door above the armrest.
- Front doors: pull the door handle on the door to open the door. The other doors remain locked.
- Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on the door to be opened; the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it. The other doors remain locked.

Comfort Access

Principle

The vehicle can be accessed without operating the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient.

The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key when it is in close proximity or in the interior.

General information

Comfort Access supports the following functions:

• Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
• Convenient closing.
• Open the tailgate.

Functional requirements

• To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be outside of the vehicle near the doors.
• The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

Unlocking

Press the button on the door handle of the driver's or front passenger door.

Depending on the settings, refer to page 72, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap may be unlocked. Unlike when unlocking using the vehicle key,

pressing the button on the door handle again does not unlock the other vehicle access points. Rather, the vehicle is locked again.

If the vehicle was locked automatically after driving off or using the central locking system button from the inside, note the following: If a door on a locked vehicle is opened from the inside using the door opener, pressing the button on the door handle will first lock the vehicle again. To unlock, press the button on the door handle again.

Locking

Press the button on the door handle of the driver's or front passenger door.

Convenient closing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold down the button on the external door handle of the driver's or front passenger door.

In addition to locking, the windows and glass sunroof will be closed.

To open the tailgate

General information

If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access, locked doors are not unlocked.

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the travel path of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

Warning

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the travel path of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

Warning

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heating elements while driving. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Opening

Press button next on tailgate.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

Malfunction

Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances:

- The battery of the vehicle key is discharged. For replacing the battery, refer to page 63.

- Fault of the radio link from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.

- Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal objects.

Do not transport the vehicle key together with metal objects.

- Fault of the radio link from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehicle key.

Do not carry the vehicle key in close proximity to other electronic devices.

Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking request detection on the door handles.

In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key or use the integrated key, refer to page 65.

Tailgate

General information

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, it is possible to specify whether the tailgate can be unlocked with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings, refer to page 72.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the travel path of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

Warning

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the travel path of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

Warning

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heating elements while driving. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Opening and closing

Opening from the outside

- Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or have the vehicle key with you.

Press button next on tailgate.

- Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. Unlocking using the vehicle key, refer to page 62.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

Opening from the inside

With Steptronic transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, press

the button in the driver's footwell.

If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, press the button in the driver's footwell twice in quick succession.

Closing

Recessed grips on the interior trim of the tailgate can be used to conveniently pull down the tailgate.

Driver profiles

Principle

In the driver profiles, individual settings for several drivers can be stored and called up again when required.

General information

There are three driver profiles with which personal vehicle settings can be stored. Every vehicle key has been assigned one of these driver profiles.

If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehicle key, the assigned personal driver profile will be activated. All settings stored in the driver profile are automatically applied.

If several drivers use their own vehicle keys, the vehicle will apply the personal settings as it is being unlocked. These settings are also restored, if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a person with a different vehicle key.

Changes to the settings are automatically stored in the driver profile currently activated.

If another driver profile is selected via the Central Information Display (CID), the settings stored in it will be applied automatically. The new driver profile is assigned to the vehicle key that is currently in use.

There is an additional guest profile available that is not assigned to any vehicle key: it can be used to apply settings in the vehicle without changing the personal driver profiles.

Functional requirements

For the system to be able to identify the driver profile associated to a particular driver, the detected vehicle key must be clearly allocated to the driver.

This is the case when:

• The driver is only carrying his or her own vehicle key.
• The driver unlocks the vehicle.
• The driver gets into the vehicle through the driver's door.

Settings

The settings, for instance for the following systems and functions, are stored in the active profile. The scope of storable settings depends on country and equipment.

• Unlocking and locking.
• Lights.
• Radio.

• Instrument cluster.

• Programmable memory buttons.

• Volumes, sound.
• Control display.
• Climate control.
• Navigation.
• Park Distance Control.
• Rearview camera.
• Head-up display.
• MINI Driving Modes.
• Intelligent Safety.

Profile management

Selecting a driver profile

Regardless of the vehicle key in use, a different driver profile may be activated. This allows you to call up personal vehicle settings, even if you did not unlock the vehicle with your own vehicle key.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.

4. "OK"

5. All settings stored in the selected driver profile are automatically applied.

6. The called-up driver profile is assigned to the vehicle key being used at the time.
7. If the driver profile is already assigned to a different vehicle key, this driver profile will be valid for both vehicle keys.

Using a guest profile

The guest profile is for individual settings that are stored in none of the three personal driver profiles.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Drive off (guest)"
4. "OK"

The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not assigned to the vehicle key currently in use.

Renaming a driver profile

A personal name can be assigned to the active driver profile to avoid confusion between the driver profiles.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this icon can be renamed.

1. "Change driver profile name"
2. Enter profile name.
3. Select the icon.

Resetting a driver profile

The settings of the driver profile currently in use are reset to their factory settings.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this icon can be reset.

1. "Reset driver profile"
2. "OK"

Exporting driver profiles

Most settings of the active driver profile can be exported.

Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving personal settings, for instance prior to a workshop visit. The stored driver profiles can be taken into another vehicle.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this icon can be exported.

1. "Export driver profile (USB)"

Select USB storage device as needed.

Importing driver profiles

Profiles stored on a USB device can be im- ported via the USB port.

The existing settings of the active driver profile are overwritten with the settings of the imported driver profile.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.

The driver profile marked with this icon can be overwritten.

1. "Import driver profile (USB)"
   Select USB storage device as needed.
2. Select the driver profile to be imported.

Displaying driver profiles during start

The driver profiles can be displayed at each startup to select the desired profile.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Show driver profiles at startup"

System limits

A clear assignment between the vehicle key and driver may not be possible in the following cases, for example.

• The front passenger unlocks the vehicle with his or her own vehicle key, but another person is driving.
• The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort Access and has multiple vehicle keys with him or her.
• The driver changes, but the vehicle is not locked and unlocked.
• Multiple vehicle keys are located in the outer area of the vehicle.

Settings

General information

Depending on the package and country version, various settings are available for the vehicle key functions.

These settings are stored for the driver profile, refer to page 69, currently used.

Unlocking

Doors

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
5. Select the desired setting:

- "Driver's door only"

Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks the entire vehicle.

- "All doors"

The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Tailgate

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
   4.

The text next to the icon indicates the current setting.

1. Select the desired setting:

2. "Tailgate" Only the tailgate is unlocked.

3. "Tailgate and door(s)" The tailgate and the doors are unlocked.
4. "Tailgate opens after unlocking" The vehicle must be unlocked before the tailgate can be used with the vehicle key.
5. "Button lock" The operation of the tailgate via the vehicle key is disabled.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, this setting may not be offered.

Automatic locking

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select the desired setting:

- "Lock automatically"

The vehicle locks automatically after a while if no door is opened after unlocking.

- "Lock after starting to drive"

The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off.

Automatic unlocking

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Unlock at end of trip"

After the engine is switched off by pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is automatically unlocked.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirmation signals.

- "Flash for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by flashing twice, locking by flashing once.

- With alarm system:

"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the horn.

Alarm system

General information

When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system reacts to the following changes:

- Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.

- Movements in the vehicle interior.

- Changes in the vehicle inclination, such as during attempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the vehicle.

- Disconnected battery voltage.

- Improper use of the socket for OBD on-board diagnostics.

- Locking the vehicle while a device is connected to the diagnostic socket. For socket for the OBD on-board diagnostics, refer to page 282.

The alarm system signals these changes visually and acoustically:

- Acoustic alarm:

Depending on local regulations, the acoustic alarm may be suppressed.

- Optical alarm:

By flashing of the hazard warning system and headlights, where required.

Do not modify the system to ensure function of the alarm system.

Overview

Indicator light on the interior mirror.

Turning on/off

The alarm system is switched on or off as soon as the vehicle is locked with the vehicle key or unlocked or locked via Comfort Access.

Opening the doors with the alarm system switched on

The alarm system is triggered when a door is opened if the door was unlocked using the integrated key in the door lock.

End alarm, refer to page 75.

Opening the tailgate with the alarm system switched on

The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm system is switched on.

After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again provided the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

- Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds.

- Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Signals of the indicator light

- The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 seconds:

The alarm system is switched on.

- Indicator light flashes for approx.

10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:

Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are not correctly closed. Correctly closed access points are secured.

Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or trunk lid are not correctly closed. Correctly closed access points are secured.

When the still open access points are closed, the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.

- The indicator light goes out after un-locking:

The vehicle has not been tampered with.

- The indicator light flashes after unlocking until the engine ignition is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes:

An alarm has been deployed.

Tilt alarm sensor

The inclination of the vehicle is monitored.

The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is towed.

Interior motion sensor

The vehicle interior is monitored.

The alarm system responds when movement is detected in the vehicle interior.

The windows and the glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

General information

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized action occurred.

Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:

- In car washes.

- In duplex garages.

- During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at sea or on a trailer.

- With animals in the vehicle.

- When the vehicle is locked after start of refueling.

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor can be switched off in such situations.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the button on the vehicle key within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked.

The indicator light illuminates for approx. 2 seconds and then continues to flash.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

Ending the alarm

• Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.
• Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key and switch on the ignition using the emergency detection of the vehicle key, refer to page 64.
• With Comfort Access: if you have the vehicle key with you, unlock the vehicle using the button on the driver's side or front passenger side door.

Power windows

General information

If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the windows are automatically closed except a gap.

Safety information

Warning

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the travel path of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

Overview

On 3-door models

Power windows

On 5-door models

Power windows

Safety switch

Opening

- Is the switch to the resistance point.

The window opens while the switch is being held.

- Is the switch beyond the resistance point.

The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient opening with the vehicle key, refer to page 61.

Closing

- the switch to the resistance point.

The window closes while the switch is being held.

- the switch beyond the resistance point.

The window closes automatically if the door is closed. Pulling the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient closing with the vehicle key, refer to page 62.

Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 67.

Jam protection system

Principle

The jam protection prevents objects or body parts becoming jammed between the door frame and window while a window is being closed.

General information

If resistance or a blockage is detected while a window is being closed, the closing action is interrupted.

Safety information

Warning

Accessories on the windows such as antennas can impact jam protection. There is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the area of movement of the windows.

Closing without the jam protection system

In case of danger from the outside or if icing might prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:

1. the switch past the resistance point and hold it there.

The window closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted.

1. the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.

The window closes without jam protection.

On 5-door models: safety switch

General information

The safety switch can be used to prevent children, for instance, from opening and closing the rear windows using the switches in the rear.

If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the safety function is switched off automatically.

Turning on/off

Press the button.

The LED illuminates if the safety function is switched on.

Malfunction

General information

In certain situations a window can only be operated to a limited extent.

- After a power interruption during the opening or closing process, the window can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case.

- The power window motors are equipped with overheating protection. If a window is opened and closed several times within a short period of time, the overheating protection switches the motor off temporarily. Depending on the degree of overheating, it may only be possible to close the window or it may not be possible to operate it at all.

In this case: allow the power window motor to cool down.

Initializing the system

The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running.

During initialization, the affected window closes without jam protection.

Warning

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the travel path of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

1. Open the affected window completely.

2. the switch to the resistance point and hold.

The window closes.

tinue holding the switch

pulled to the resistance point.

The window opens and closes once or twice after approx. 15 seconds, depending on the vehicle's equipment.

1. Release switch.

Panoramic glass sunroof

General information

In the event of a severe accident, the glass sunroof is automatically closed.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and closing.

Overview

Tilting the glass sunroof

Press back the switch up to or beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is raised.

Opening glass sunroof

When the glass sunroof is closed

Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and release it twice.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again

stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised

- Slide switch back to the resistance point and hold. The glass sunroof is opened as long as the switch is pressed.

- Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Comfort position

In some models, the wind noises in the car's interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not fully open. In these models, the automatic function initially only opens the glass sunroof up to this comfort position.

Pressing the switch again opens the glass sunroof fully.

Closing glass sunroof

With the glass sunroof open

- Slide switch forward to the resistance point and hold. The glass sunroof is closed as long as the switch is pressed and stops in the raised position.

- Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed and stops in the raised position.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

- Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it twice.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised

Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Opening/closing the sun protection

Use the handle to slide the sun protection into the desired position.

Jam protection system

Principle

The jam protection prevents objects or body parts from becoming jammed between the roof frame and glass sunroof while the glass sunroof is closing.

General information

If resistance or a blockage is detected while the glass sunroof is being closed, the closing action is interrupted.

The glass sunroof opens slightly.

Closing without the jam protection system

If there is an external danger, proceed as follows:

1. Push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it.

The glass sunroof closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted.

1. Push the switch forward again past the resistance point and hold until the glass sunroof closes without jam protection.

Make sure that the closing path is clear.

Initializing after a power interruption

After a power interruption during the opening or closing process, the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent.

The system must be initialized in this case.

MINI recommends having this work performed by an authorized service center or

another qualified service center or repair shop.

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Sitting safely

An ideal seat position that meets the needs of the occupants can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

In the event of an accident, the correct seat position plays an important role. Follow the information in the following chapters:

• Seats, refer to page 80.
• Seat belts, refer to page 83.
• Head restraints, refer to page 85.
• Airbags, refer to page 151.

Front seats

Safety information

Warning

Seat setting while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

Warning

With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the protective effect of the seat belt can no longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding under the seat belt in an accident. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the most upright position as possible and do not adjust again while driving.

Warning

There is a danger of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the travel path of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Adjusting seats

Overview

1 Longitudinal direction
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt

Longitudinal direction

Warning

Unexpected movements of the seat while driving may occur if the seat is unlocked. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. After adjusting, move the seat forward or back slightly, making sure the seat engages properly.

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction.

Height

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as needed to reach the desired height.

Backrest tilt

Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Lumbar support

The curvature of the seat backrest can be adjusted in a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright sitting position.

Turn the wheel in order to increase or decrease the curvature.

Thigh support

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support.

In 3-door models: entering the rear

Safety information

Warning

There is a danger of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the travel path of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Warning

Unexpected movements of the seat while driving may occur if the seat is unlocked. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. After adjusting, move the seat forward or back slightly, making sure the seat engages properly.

Warning

Unexpected movements of the rear seat backrest while driving may occur if the rear seat backrest is unlocked. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of injury. Fold back and lock the backrests before driving. Make sure the backrest en-

gages correctly by slightly moving forward and back.

Fold the seat backrest forward

1. Pull lever up to the stop.

1. Fold the seat backrest forward.

2. Push the seat forward.

Original position

The driver's seat features a mechanical memory function for forward/back and backrest adjustment.

1. Push the seat back into the initial position.

2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.

If the backrest is folded back when the seat is not yet in the initial position, the seat engages in the current position. In this case, manually adjust longitudinal direction, refer to page 81.

Front seat heating

Overview

Seat heating

Turning on

Press the button once for each temperature level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are illuminated.

If the trip is continued within approx.

15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is switched on automatically with the temperature selected last.

When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to page 240, the heater output is reduced.

Turning off

Press and hold the button until the LEDs turn off.

Seat belts

General information

The vehicle is fitted with four or five seat belts to ensure occupants' safety. However, the seat belts can only offer protection when adjusted correctly.

Always make sure that seat belts are being worn by all occupants before driving off. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they do not replace seat belts.

If needed, detach the seat belt in the rear from the belt retainer on the side.

All belt fastening points are designed to achieve the best possible protective effect of the seat belts with proper use of the seat belts and correct seat setting. Follow notes on sitting safely, refer to page 80.

The two outer seat belt buckles of the rear seat are intended for the persons sitting on the left and right.

The center seat belt buckle of the rear seat is intended for the person sitting in the middle.

Safety information

Warning

Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one person will potentially defeat the ability of the seat belt to serve its protective function. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not strap in more than one person per single seat belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be transported and secured in designated child restraint systems.

Warning

The protective effect of safety gear, including seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.

Warning

With a rear seat backrest that is not locked, the protective effect of the middle seat belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. If you are using the middle seat belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.

Warning

The protective effect of safety gear, including seat belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the following situations:

• The seat belts or seat belt buckles are damaged, soiled, or changed in any other way.
• Seat belt tensioners or roll-up mechanism were modified.

Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not modify seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat belt tensioners, roll-up mechanisms, or belt anchors and keep them clean. After an accident, have the seat belts checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct use of seat belts

• Wear the seat belt tight to your body over your lap and shoulders, without twisting it.
• Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over your lap. The seat belt must not press on your stomach.
• Do not rub the seat belt against sharp edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or fragile objects.
• Avoid thick clothing.
• Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward around your upper body area.

Buckling the seat belt

1. Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder and hip to put it on.
2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage audibly.

Unbuckling the seat belt

1. Hold down the seat belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the seat belt back into its roll-up mechanism.

Seat belt reminder for driver's seat and passenger's seat

General information

The seat belt reminder is issued when the driver's side seat belt is not buckled.

The seat belt reminder is also active when the front passenger seat belt is not buckled or objects are on the front passenger seat.

The seat belt reminder is also activated when a passenger unbuckles a seat belt during the trip.

Display in the instrument cluster

The indicator light illuminates and a signal sounds. Make sure that the seat belts are positioned correctly.

The seat belt reminder can also be activated

if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.

Seat belt reminder for rear seats

General information

The seat belt reminder is automatically activated each time the engine starts.

The seat belt reminder is also activated when a passenger unbuckles a rear seat belt during the trip.

Display in the instrument cluster

The indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates after the engine is started.

Icon Description

Green: the seat belt is buckled on the corresponding rear seat.

Red: the seat belt is not buckled on the corresponding rear seat.

Front head restraints

Safety information

Warning

Removal or incorrect adjustment of head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

• Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.
• Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.
• Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

• Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
• Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.
• Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.
• Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height: John Cooper Works sport seat

The height of the head restraints cannot be set.

Adjusting the height

- To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

- To raise: push the head restraint up.

After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Removing: John Cooper Works sport seat

The head restraints cannot be removed.

Removing

Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest forward.
2. Pull head restraint up to the stop.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

Installing

Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.

Rear head restraints

Safety information

Warning

Removal or incorrect adjustment of head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

• Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.
• Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.
• Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

• Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
• Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.
• Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.
• Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height

• To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.
• To raise: push the head restraint up.

After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Fold down

• To fold down: press the button, arrow 1, and press down the head restraint, arrow 2.
• Forward: fold the head restraint toward the front as far as it will go. Make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Removing

Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to page 229, in question.
2. Pull head restraint up against the resistance.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

Installing

Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

General information

The front passenger's side exterior mirror is more curved than the driver's side mirror.

Safety information

Warning

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. The distance to the road users behind could be incorrectly estimated, for instance while changing lanes. There is a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind by looking over your shoulder.

Overview

1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out

Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror: Slide the switch.

Adjusting electrically

Press the button.

The mirror movement follows the button movement.

Malfunction

In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.

Automatic heating

Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as needed and when the ignition is switched on.

Automatic dimming feature

The exterior mirror on the driver's side is automatically dimmed. Photocells in the car's interior mirror, refer to page 89, are used to control this.

Automatic Curb Monitor

Principle

If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the passenger's side is tilted downward. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.

Activating

1. slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating

Slide the switch to the front passenger's side exterior mirror position.

Interior mirror, manually dimmable

Flip lever

To reduce the blinding glare of the interior mirror, flip the lever forward.

Turn button

Turn the button to reduce the blinding glare by the interior mirror.

Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature

Overview

Photocells are used for control:

• In the mirror glass.
• On the rear of the mirror.

Functional requirements

• Keep the photocells clean.
• Do not cover the area between the interior mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel

Safety information

Warning

Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary only.

Adjusting

1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seat position.
3. Fold the lever back up.

Steering wheel heating

Overview

Steering wheel heating

Turning on/off

Press the button.

• On: the LED illuminates.
• Off: the LED goes out.

If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes after an intermediate stop, the steering wheel heating turns on automatically if the function was turned on at the completion of the last trip.

Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

The right place for children

Safety information

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions:

• Pressing the Start/Stop button.
• Releasing the parking brake.
• Opening and closing the doors or windows.
• Engaging selector lever position N.
• Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Warning

A hot vehicle may result in death to persons, especially children, or animals. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave persons, especially children, or animals unattended in the vehicle.

Warning

Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child restraint systems and their components to become very hot. Persons may sustain burn injuries when touching the hot components. There is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight or cover where necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint system cool down before transporting a child. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Children in the rear seat

General information

Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the rear seat.

Children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported in the rear seat in suitable child restraint systems designed for the age, weight and size of the child. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight, or size.

Safety information

Warning

The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without suitable additional child restraint systems. The protective effect of safety gear, including seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.

Children on the front passenger seat

General information

Before using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and side airbags on the passenger's side are deactivated. For automatic deactivation of front passenger airbags, refer to page 153.

Safety information

Warning

Active front passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are deployed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat setting or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

Installing child restraint systems

General information

Pay attention to the specifications of the child restraint system manufacturer when selecting, installing, and using child restraint systems.

In order to facilitate the installation of a back-facing child restraint system in the rear:

Move the front seat as far up as possible before folding down the backrest.

Safety information

Warning

The protective effect of child restraint systems and their fastening systems which have been damaged or exposed to an accident can be limited or lost. A child cannot be properly restrained in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.

Do not use child restraint systems which have been damaged or exposed to an accident.

If attachment systems have been damaged or strained by an accident, have them checked and replaced by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat setting or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

On the rear seats

In order to facilitate the installation of a back-facing child restraint system:

Move the front seat as far up as possible before folding down the backrest.

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating the airbags

Warning

Active front passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are deployed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front passenger airbags are deactivated and that the

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.

Before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the passenger's side are deactivated.

Deactivate the front passenger airbags automatically, refer to page 153.

Seat position and height

After installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest and thus best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident.

If the upper attachment point of the seat belt is located in front of the belt guide of the child restraint seat, move the front passenger seat carefully forward until the best possible belt guide position is reached.

Child seat security

The rear seat belts and the front passenger seat belt can be permanently locked to fasten child restraint systems.

Locking the seat belt

1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the seat belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system. The seat belt is disabled.

Unlocking the seat belt

1. Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in completely.

LATCH child seat mountings

General information

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.

Pay attention to the operating and safety information from the child restraint system manufacturer when installing and using LATCH child restraint fixing systems.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors

General information

The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Safety information

Warning

If the lower mountings of the child restraint system are not correctly engaged, the protective effect of the child restraint system is limited. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that the lower mountings are correctly engaged and that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest.

Warning

The mounts for the lower mountings and attachment points of the child restraint system are intended for attaching child restraint systems only. If other objects are attached, the mounts or attachment points can be damaged. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Only attach child restraint systems at the corresponding mounts for the lower mountings or attachment points.

Position

Icon Meaning

The corresponding icon shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.

Seats equipped with lower mountings are marked with a pair (2) of LATCH icons.

For vehicles equipped with a middle seat:

It is not recommended to use the inner lower mountings of standard outer LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle seat belt instead for the middle seat.

Before installing LATCH child restraint systems

Pull the seat belt away from the area of the child seat mountings.

Assembly of LATCH child restraint fixing systems

1. Mount child restraint system, see manufacturer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are properly engaged.

Child restraint systems with tether strap

Safety information

Warning

If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used for the child restraint system, the protective effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. Ensure that the upper retaining strap is guided to the upper attachment point without twisting and not over sharp edges.

Warning

If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the protective effect of the child restraint system is limited or nonexistent. In certain situations, for instance braking maneuvers or in case of an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests are locked.

Warning

The mounts for the lower mountings and attachment points of the child restraint system are intended for attaching child restraint systems only. If other objects are attached, the mounts or attachment points can be damaged. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Only attach child restraint systems at the corresponding mounts for the lower mountings or attachment points.

Attachment points

The respective icon shows the attachment point for the upper retaining strap. Seats with an upper top

tether are marked with this icon. It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear shelf.

Routing the retaining strap

1 Driving direction
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Attachment point
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the attachment point

1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retaining strap between or along both sides of the supports of the head restraint to the anchor.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the anchor on the rear seat.
4. Tighten the retaining strap.

ON 5-door models: Locking the doors and windows

Doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up. The door can now be opened from the outside only.

Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver's door if children are being transported in the rear.

This disables various functions so that they cannot be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 76.

Driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Start/Stop button

Principle

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine.

Manual transmission: the engine starts with the clutch

pedal pressed when the Start/Stop button is pressed.

Steptronic transmission: the engine starts in selector lever position P or N with the brake pedal depressed when you press the Start/Stop button.

Ignition on

Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop button without stepping on the clutch pedal.

Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop button, but do not press on the brake pedal at the same time.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation.

Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster illuminate for a varied length of time.

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electrical components.

Ignition off

Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the clutch pedal.

Steptronic transmission: shift to selector lever position P, press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the brake.

All indicator lights in the instrument cluster turn off.

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electrical components.

Safety precautions

The ignition is switched off automatically in the following situations while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is off:

• When locking the vehicle, even if the low beams are switched on.
• Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only available when the low beams are switched off.
• When opening or closing the driver's door, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the low beams are switched off.

• While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled with driver's door open and low beams off.

• When the front doors are opened if there is no other person sitting in the front seats.

• The low beams switch to parking lights after some minutes of no use.

Steptronic transmission: when switching off the ignition, the selector lever position P is engaged automatically if the selector lever position R, D or M/S is engaged.

Radio-ready state

General information

In the radio-ready state, certain electrical components remain ready for operation.

Activating

With the engine running, press the Start/Stop button.

If the engine is not running and the ignition is switched on: the system automatically activates radio-ready state when the door is opened if the lights are switched off or the daytime driving lights are switched on.

Radio-ready state remains active if, for instance the ignition is automatically switched off for the following reasons:

• Opening or closing the driver's door.
• Unfastening of the driver's seat belt.
• When automatically changing over from low beams to parking lights.

Switching off automatically

The radio-ready state is switched off automatically in the following situations:

• If the driver's or front passenger door is opened when exiting the vehicle, with the engine switched off manually.
• If the ignition is switched off manually with the Start/Stop button.

• After approx. 8 minutes.

• When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system.

• Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started.

Starting the engine

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are colorless and odorless. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling away.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
• On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

NOTICE

Repeated attempts to start the engine or repeated starting of the vehicle in rapid succession can cause the starter to overheat. This also results in unburned or inadequately burned fuel, and can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid repeated starting of the vehicle, particularly repeated starting in rapid succession.

Gasoline engine

Depending on the motorization, the full drive power may not be available for approximately 30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case, the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.

Manual transmission

Starting the engine

1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to Neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.

Steptronic transmission

Starting the engine

1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.

Engine stop

Safety information

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions:

• Pressing the Start/Stop button.
• Releasing the parking brake.
• Opening and closing the doors or windows.
• Engaging selector lever position N.
• Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling away.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
• On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Manual transmission

Switching off the engine

1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the Start/Stop button.
   The engine is switched off.
   The radio-ready state is switched on.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.

Steptronic transmission

Switching off the engine

1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the parking brake.
2. Engage selector lever position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
   The engine is switched off.
   The radio-ready state is switched on.

Auto Start/Stop function

Principle

The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The engine starts automatically for driving off.

After each engine start using the Start/Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready and is activated at speeds faster than about 3 mph/5 km/h.

Depending on the selected driving mode, refer to page 178, the system is automatically activated or deactivated.

Engine stop

Functional requirements

The engine is switched off automatically during a stop under the following conditions:

Manual transmission:

• Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is not pressed.
• The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed.

Steptronic transmission:

• The selector lever is in selector lever position D.
• The brake pedal remains depressed while the vehicle is at a standstill.
• The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed.

In order to be able to release the brake pedal at a vehicle standstill, engage the selector lever in position P. The engine remains off.

To continue driving depress the brake pedal. When a gear is engaged, the engine starts automatically.

The air flow from the air conditioning system is reduced when the engine is switched off.

Steptronic transmission: manual engine stop

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, the engine can be switched off manually, if the engine was not switched off automatically when the vehicle stopped:

- Depress the brake pedal forcefully again from the current pedal position.

- Engage selector lever position P.

If all functional preconditions are fulfilled, the engine switches off.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

The display indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready for an Automatic engine start.

The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic engine stop have not been met.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: display

The display indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready for an Automatic engine start.

The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic engine stop have not been met.

Functional limitations

The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations:

• Outside temperature too low.
• The outside temperature is high and automatic climate control is running.
• The car's interior has not yet been heated or cooled to the required level.
• The engine is not yet at operating temperature.
• The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned.

• After driving in reverse.

• Window condensation when the automatic climate control is switched on.

• The vehicle battery charge is very low.
• At higher elevations.
• The hood is unlocked.
• The Automatic Parking Assistant is activated.
• Stop-and-go traffic.
• Selector lever in selector lever position R, N or M/S.

Starting the engine

The engine starts automatically to drive off under the following conditions:

- Manual transmission: clutch pedal is pressed.

- Steptronic transmission: by releasing the brake pedal.

After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety mode

After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met:

• The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open.
• The hood was unlocked.

Some indicator lights illuminate for a varied length of time.

The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop button.

Functional limitations

Even if driving off was not intended, the deactivated engine starts up automatically in the following situations:

• Excessive heating up of the car's interior when air conditioning is switched on.

• With steering operation.

• Steptronic transmission: change from selector lever position D to R, N or M/S.

• Steptronic transmission: change from selector lever position P to R, N, D or M/S.
• The vehicle begins rolling.
• Window condensation when the automatic climate control is switched on.
• The vehicle battery charge is very low.
• Excessive cooling of the car's interior when the heating is switched on.
• Manual transmission: low brake vacuum pressure; this can occur, for instance if the brake pedal is depressed a number of times in succession.

Additional Auto Start/Stop function

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country-specific version, the vehicle features a variety of sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The Auto Start/Stop function uses this information to adapt to various traffic situations in a proactive manner.

For instance, this applies to the following situations:

• When a situation is detected in which the stopping time is expected to be very short, the engine is not switched off automatically. A message appears on the control display, depending on the situation.
• When a situation is detected in which the vehicle needs to drive off immediately, the engine is started automatically.

The function may be restricted if the navigation data is invalid, outdated or not available, for example.

Switching the system on/off

Using the button

Press the button.

- LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.

The engine is started during an automatic engine stop.

The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button.

- LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is activated.

Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop

During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, for instance when leaving it.

Manual transmission:

1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.

Steptronic transmission:

1. Engage selector lever position P.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.
3. Set the parking brake.

Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Automatic deactivation

In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons, for instance if no driver is detected.

Malfunction

The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches off the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Parking brake, manual

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling away.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
• On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Applying

The lever automatically engages after being pulled up.

The indicator light illuminates red. The parking brake is set.

Lower light: indicator light in Canadian models

If for once use during driving is required, apply the parking brake slightly and hold the button down.

To prevent corrosion and one-sided braking effect, lightly apply the parking brake periodically while coasting, if traffic conditions permit.

The brake lights will not illuminate if the parking brake is set.

Releasing the parking brake

Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide the lever down.

Parking brake, electric

Principle

The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is parked.

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling away.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
• On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions:

• Pressing the Start/Stop button.
• Releasing the parking brake.
• Opening and closing the doors or windows.
• Engaging selector lever position N.
• Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Overview

Parking brake

Setting the parking brake

With a stationary vehicle

Pull the switch.

The LED illuminates.

The indicator light illuminates red.

The parking brake is set.

Depending on the stopping situation, the parking brake is engaged automatically.

Steptronic transmission: in some parking situations, the parking brake is automatically engaged, when selector lever position P is engaged. In these cases, the parking brake is released automatically when you leave the selector lever position P.

While driving

To use as emergency brake while driving:

Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the switch is being pulled.

The indicator lights illuminate red, a signal sounds, and the brake lights illuminate.

A Check Control message is displayed.

If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete stop, the parking brake is engaged.

Releasing the parking brake

Releasing the parking brake manually

1. Turn on the ignition.

2. Manual transmission: press the switch while the brake pedal is depressed.

Steptronic transmission: press

the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or with selector lever position P.

The LED and the indicator light go out.

The parking brake is released.

Automatic release in cars with Steptronic transmission

For automatic release, step on the accelerator pedal.

The LED and the indicator light go out.

The parking brake is automatically released when you step on the accelerator pedal when the following prerequisites are met:

• Engine on.
• Gear position engaged.
  – Driver buckled in and doors closed.

Automatic release in cars with manual transmission

Drive off as usual. The parking brake disengages when the clutch pedal is released.

The LED and the indicator light go out.

Under the following conditions, the parking brake is automatically released:

• Engine on.
• Gear engaged.
• Driver buckled in and doors closed.
• Engine power is sufficient to drive off.

Malfunction

If the parking brake fails or in case of a fault, secure the vehicle against rolling away before exiting.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for instance with a wheel chock, after getting out of the vehicle.

After a power interruption

Commissioning

1. Turn on the ignition.

1. Pass the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or with selector lever position P.

Commissioning may take a few seconds. Some mechanical sounds associated with this process are normal.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster turns off as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation

again.

Turn signal, high beams, head-light flasher

Turn signal

Flashing

Press the lever past the resistance point.

Canada: the lever returns into its initial position after actuation. To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance point.

Triple turn signal activation

Lightly tap the lever up or down.

The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Brief flashing

Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Malfunction

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

High beams, headlight flasher

Press the lever forward or pull it backward.

- High beams on, arrow 1. The high beams illuminate when the low beams are switched on. - High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Window wiper system

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded-away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

The wiper blades can wear out or become damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry window for a longer period of time. The wiper motor can overheat. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the wipers when the window is dry.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Turning on

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached.

• Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
• Intermittent operation or rain sensor, position 1.
• Normal wiper speed, position 2.
• Fast wiper speed, position 3.

When the journey is interrupted with the window wiper system switched on: when travel continues, the wipers resume at their previous level.

Turning off and flick wipe

Press the lever down.

• Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its basic setting.
• Flick wipe: press the lever down from the basic setting.

The lever automatically returns to its basic setting when released.

Intermittent operation or rain sensor

Principle

The rain sensor automatically controls the wiper operation depending on the intensity of the rainfall.

General information

The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain sensor, the interval of the wiper operation is predefined.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in car washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes.

Activating

Press the lever up once from its basic setting, arrow 1.

Wiping operation is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not start.

Deactivating

Press the lever back into the basic setting.

Setting the interval period or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the interval period.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sensor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-freeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the washer pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

The washer fluid is sprayed on the wind-shield, and the wipers are turned on briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles

The washer jets are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear wiper

Switching on the rear wiper

Turn the outer switch upward.

• Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
• Intermittent operation, arrow 1. When reverse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear window

Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.

• In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle position when released.
• In intermittent operation: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released.

The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir fill level is low.

Fold-out position of the wipers

Principle

The fold-out position enables the wipers to be folded out from the windshield.

General information

Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded-away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding out the wipers

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down until the wipers stop in a nearly vertical position.

1. Fold the wipers all the way out from the windshield.

Folding in the wipers

After the wipers are folded back down, the window wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back in onto the wind-shield.
2. Turn on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Canada: window wiper system

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded-away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

The wiper blades can wear out or become damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry window for a longer period of time. The wiper motor can overheat. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the wipers when the window is dry.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Turning on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance point.

• Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
• Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point.

The lever automatically returns to its basic setting when released.

Turning off and flick wipe

Press the lever down.

• To switch off from fast wiper speed: press down twice.
• To switch off from normal wiper speed: press down once.
• Flick wipe: press down once.

The lever automatically returns to its basic setting when released.

Intermittent operation or rain sensor

Principle

The rain sensor automatically controls the wiper operation depending on the intensity of the rainfall.

General information

The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain sensor, the interval of the wiper operation is predefined.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in car washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes.

Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Wiping operation is started.

If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: the LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not start.

If a journey is interrupted with the rain sensor switched on: if the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automatically activated again.

Setting the interval period or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the interval period.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sensor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-freeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the washer pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

The washer fluid is sprayed on the wind-shield, and the wipers are turned on briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles

The washer jets are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear wiper

Switching on the rear wiper

Turn the outer switch upward.

• Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
• Intermittent operation, arrow 1. When reverse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear window

Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.

• In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle position when released.
• In intermittent operation: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released.

The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir fill level is low.

Fold-out position of the wipers

Principle

The fold-out position enables the wipers to be folded out from the windshield.

General information

Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded-away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding out the wipers

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press the wiper lever up past the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds, until the wipers remain in a nearly vertical position.

1. Fold the wipers all the way out from the windshield.

Folding in the wipers

After the wipers are folded back down, the window wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back in onto the wind-shield.
2. Turn on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Washer fluid

General information

All windshield washer jets are supplied from one tank.

Use a mixture of tap water and windshield washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be used.

Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Safety information

Warning

Some types of antifreeze can contain harmful substances and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and an injury hazard. Follow the instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.

United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container.

Use of BMW's Windshield Washer Concentrate or the equivalent is recommended.

Warning

Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Only add washer fluid when the engine is cooled down. Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE

Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on the windows can lead to damage to the car wash. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add silicon-containing additives to the washer fluid.

NOTICE

Mixing different windshield washer fluid concentrates or antifreeze can damage the washer system. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not mix different windshield washer fluid concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the information and mixture ratios provided on the containers.

Overview

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment.

Malfunction

The use of undiluted windshield washer fluid concentrate or alcohol-based anti-freeze can lead to incorrect readings at temperatures below +5 °F/-15 °C.

Manual transmission

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling away.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
• On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

NOTICE

When shifting to a lower gear, excessive RPM can damage the engine. There is a risk of damage to property. When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right.

Shift pattern

- 1-6: forward gears.

- R: reverse gear.

Shifting

General information

Depending on the motorization, the RPM during a shifting operation is adjusted automatically as required for harmonious gear changing.

Reverse gear

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

To overcome the resistance push the gear-shift lever dynamically to the left and engage reverse gear with a forward shifting movement.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power, for instance in a car wash, or be pushed.

1. Turn on the ignition.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out of a forward gear or reverse.
3. Release the parking brake.

Steptronic transmission

Principle

The Steptronic transmission combines the functions of an automatic transmission with the possibility of manual shifting, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling away.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
• On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Selector lever version

Selector lever

The selector lever positions R, N, and D are selected by tapping the selector lever forward or back. The selector lever automatically returns to the center position when released.

The selector lever position P is engaged by pressing the P button on the selector lever or, in certain situations, automatically, refer to page 116.

Selector lever positions

Gear position D

Selector lever position for normal driving. All gears for forward travel are activated automatically.

R reverse

Engage selector lever position R only when the vehicle is stationary.

N neutral

The vehicle may be pushed or roll without engine power in selector lever position N, for instance in vehicle washes, refer to page 117.

Parking position P

General information

Selector lever position, for instance for parking the vehicle.

The transmission blocks the drive wheels in selector lever position P.

Engage selector lever position P only when the vehicle is stationary.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to move.

Automatic parking position

Selector lever position P is engaged automatically in situations such as the following:

- After the engine is switched off when the vehicle is in the radio-ready state, refer to page 98, or when the ignition is switched off, refer to page 97, while selector lever position R, D or M/S is engaged.

- If the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and selector lever position D, M/S or R is engaged.

- After the ignition has been switched off while selector lever position N is engaged.

Engaging selector lever positions

General information

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear position or reverse, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to drive off.

Functional requirements

Only when the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to change from selector lever position P to another selector lever position.

Depending on the transmission version, the engine may have to be running too.

The selection lever position P cannot be changed until all technical prerequisites are met.

Engaging selector lever position D, N, R

A selector lever lock prevents the following incorrect operation:

• Unintentional shifting into selector lever position R.
• Unintentional shifting from selector lever position P into another selector lever position.
• Press and hold the button to release the selector lever lock.

1. With the driver's seat belt fastened, briefly push the selector lever in the desired direction, past a resistance point, if needed. The selector lever automati-

cally returns to the center position when released.

Engaging selector lever position P

Press button P.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

General information

In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to roll without its own power for a short distance, for instance in a car wash or to be pushed.

Engaging selector lever position N

NOTICE

Selector lever position P is automatically engaged when the ignition is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not switch ignition off in car washes.

1. Start the engine while pressing on the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage selector lever position N.
5. Switch the engine off.

In this way, the ignition remains switched on, and a Check Control message is displayed.

The vehicle can roll.

Irrespective of the ignition, the selector lever position P is automatically engaged after approx. 15 minutes.

If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position.

Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if needed, refer to page 119.

Kickdown

Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Press down accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point.

Sport program M/S

Principle

The shifting points and shifting times in the Sport program are designed for sportier handling. The transmission, for instance shifts up later and the shifting times are shorter.

Activating the Sport program

Press the selector lever to the left from selector lever position D.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, for instance S1.

The sport program of the transmission is activated.

Ending the Sport program

Press the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Manual mode M/S

Principle

Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.

Activating manual mode

1. Press the selector lever to the left from selector lever position D, arrow 1.

1. Press the selector lever forward or pull it backward, arrows 2.

Manual mode M/S becomes active and the gear is changed.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, for instance M1.

Shifting

- To downshift: press the selector lever forward.

- Upshifting: pull the selector lever rearwards.

The Steptronic transmission continues shifting automatically in certain situations, for instance when certain engine speed limits are reached.

When M2 is set manually while the vehicle is stationary, the transmission will no longer shift back to M1. This shift characteristic is retained until you engage M1 manually or exit M.

Avoiding automatic upshifting

Once a particular engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed.

John Cooper Works: once particular engine speeds are attained, upshifting is not automatically performed in M/S manual mode.

For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmission, automatic shift operations are not performed if one of the following conditions is met:

- The Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.

- TRACTION is activated.

In addition, there is no downshifting for kickdown.

With the appropriate transmission version, the lowest possible gear can be selected by simultaneously activating kickdown and operating the left shift paddles. This is not possible by switching briefly via the shift paddles from selector lever position D to manual mode M/S.

Ending the manual mode

Press the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport transmission

Principle

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel.

General information

Shifting

Gears will only be changed at appropriate engine and road speeds, for instance down-shifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high.

Short-term manual mode

In selector lever position D, actuating a shift paddle switches into manual mode temporarily.

After conservative driving in manual mode without acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode.

It is possible to switch into automatic mode as follows:

• Keep the right shift paddle pulled until D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
• In addition to the pulled right shift paddle, pull the left shift paddle.

Continuous manual mode

In selector lever position S, actuating a shift paddle switches into manual mode permanently.

Shifting

• Upshifting: pull the right shift paddle.
• Downshifting: pull left shift paddle.
• Downshifting to the lowest possible gear: keep the left shift paddle pulled.

The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Displays in the instrument cluster

The selector lever position is displayed, for example P.

Releasing the transmission lock electronically

General information

Unlock the transmission lock electronically, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of a hazardous area in the event of a malfunction.

Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.

Engaging selector lever position N

Unlocking is possible, if the starter can crank the engine.

1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must audibly start.
3. Press the button on the selector lever, arrow 1, and press and hold the selector lever into selector lever position N, arrow N, until selector lever position N is displayed in the instrument cluster.
   A Check Control message is displayed.

1. Release the selector lever.
2. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops.
3. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous area and secure it against rolling away.

With some transmission versions, the procedure for unlocking is as follows:

1. Press the Start/Stop button.
2. Press and hold down brake pedal.

3. Press the button on the selector lever, arrow 1, and press and hold the selector lever into selector lever position N, arrow N, until selector lever position N is displayed in the instrument cluster.
   A Check Control message is displayed.

4. Release the selector lever.

5. Release the brake.

6. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous area and secure it against rolling away.
   For additional information, see the chapter on tow-starting and towing.

Steptronic Sport transmission: Launch Control

Principle

Launch Control enables optimum acceleration on roads with good traction under dry surrounding conditions.

General information

The use of Launch Control causes premature component wear since this function represents a very heavy load for the vehicle.

Do not use Launch Control during break-in, refer to page 234.

Do not turn the steering wheel when driving off with Launch Control.

Functional requirements

Launch Control is available as soon as the engine and transmission are at operating temperature.

Depending on the outside temperature and driving style, the engine and transmission require an interrupted trip of up to 30 miles/50 km in order to reach the operating temperature needed for Launch Control.

Starting with launch control

While the engine is running:

1. OFF button and select SPORT with the MINI Driving Modes switch.

The instrument cluster displays TRACTION in combination with SPORT. The DSC OFF indicator light illuminates.

1. Engage selector lever position S.

2. With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake.

3. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point, kick-down.

A destination flag is displayed in the instrument cluster.

1. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait briefly until the engine speed is constant. Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.

2. Release the brake within 3 seconds after the destination flag illuminates.

The vehicle accelerates.

Upshifting occurs automatically as long as the destination flag is displayed and the accelerator pedal is not released.

Repeated use during a trip

After Launch Control has been used, the transmission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes before Launch Control can be used again.

After using Launch Control

To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic Stability Control.

System limits

An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.

Displays

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily avail-

able in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: overview

1 Tachometer 130
2 Indicator/warning lights
3 Speedometer

4 Fuel gauge 130
5 Display/reset kilometers 130
6 Electronic displays 124

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: overview

1 Tachometer 130
2 Display/reset kilometers 130
3 Electronic displays 125

4 Vehicle speed
5 Indicator/warning lights
6 Fuel gauge 130

Instrument cluster without additional functions: electronic displays

1 Driver assistance systems

Messages, for instance Check Control

Time 131

Outside temperature 131

Selection lists 135

Total kilometers/trip odometer 130

On-board computer 136

2 Selector lever position 115

Gear shift indicator 133

3 MINI Driving Modes switch status 178

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: electronic displays

1 Selector lever position 115

Gear shift indicator 133

2 Time 131

MINI Driving Modes switch status 178

3 Driver assistance systems

4 Outside temperature 131

Check Control

Principle

The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the monitored systems.

General information

A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up display.

Range 131

5 Messages, for instance Check Control

Selection lists 135

Navigation instructions

6 Total kilometers/trip odometer 130

On-board computer 136

In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a text message may appear on the control display.

Indicator/warning lights

General information

The indicator/warning lights can illuminate in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and illuminate temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Red lights

Seat belt reminder

Indicator light flashes or is illuminated: seat belt on the driver or passenger's side is not buckled. The seat belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat. Make sure that the seat belts are positioned correctly.

Seat belt reminder for rear seats

The seat belt is not buckled on the corresponding rear seat.

Airbag system

Warning light illuminates briefly: Indicates the operational readiness of the entire airbag system and seat belt tensioners when the ignition is switched on.

Warning light illuminates continuously: There is a malfunction. Have the vehicle checked immediately by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Operational readiness of airbag system, refer to page 153.

Parking brake, manual

The parking brake is set.

For releasing the parking brake, refer to page 103.

Parking brake, electric

The parking brake is set.

For releasing the parking brake, refer to page 104.

Brake system

Brake pads are worn or there is a fault in the brake system.

The braking assistance may not be operational. A higher pedal force may be required for braking.

Have the vehicle checked immediately by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Forward Collision Warning

Warning light illuminates: Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle, is detected. Increased awareness is required.

Warning light flashes: Risk of imminent collision with a vehicle is detected. Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Pedestrian Warning

Warning light flashes and acoustic signal sounds: Collision with a person is imminent. Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: orange lights

Active Cruise Control

The number bars shows the selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead.

Camera-based cruise control, refer to page 181.

Active Cruise Control, vehicle detection

Warning light illuminates: Vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

Warning light flashes: Conditions are not adequate for the system to work.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until the driver actively resumes control of the vehicle by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Yellow lights

Antilock Braking System

The system may not be operational. The Antilock Braking System system is not available.

The ability to steer may be restricted during full braking.

Have checked immediately by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Antilock Braking System, refer to page 176.

Dynamic Stability Control

Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stability Control is regulating the drive and brake power. The vehicle is sta-

bilized. Reduce speed and modify your driving style to the driving circumstances.

Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability Control has failed.

Have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 176.

The Dynamic Stability Control deactivated or the Dynamic Traction Control activated

The Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or the Dynamic Traction Control is activated.

Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 176, and Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 178.

Flat tire monitor

Warning light illuminates: Flat Tire Monitor is indicating a flat tire or tire pressure loss.

Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

Flat tire monitor, refer to page 160.

Tire pressure monitor

Warning light illuminates: Tire Pressure Monitor is indicating a flat tire or tire pressure loss. Follow the in-

formation in the Check Control message.

Warning light flashes then illuminates continuously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot be detected.

- Fault caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.

- The Tire Pressure Monitor could not complete the reset: reset the system again.

- A wheel without wheel electronics is mounted: have it checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.

- Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 155.

Steering system

Steering system may be faulty.

Have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Emissions

- The warning light illuminates:

Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

- The warning light flashes under certain circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the vehicle checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter.

Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics, refer to page 282.

Green lights

Seat belt reminder for rear seats

Green: the seat belt is buckled on the corresponding rear seat.

Turn signal

Turn signal switched on.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn sig-

nal bulb has failed.

Turn signal, refer to page 105.

Parking lights, headlights

Parking lights or headlights are switched on.

Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, refer to page 145.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: bad weather light

Bad weather light is switched on.

Bad weather light, refer to page 148.

Automatic High Beam Assistant

Automatic High Beam Assistant is switched on.

High beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the traffic situation.

Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to page 147.

Cruise Control

The system is switched on. It maintains the speed that was predefined using the control elements on the

steering wheel.

Manual Speed Limiter

The indicator light illuminates: the system is switched on.

The indicator light flashes: the set speed limit has been exceeded. If this happens, a signal sounds.

Reduce speed or deactivate system.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: Lane Departure Warning

The indicator light illuminates: the system is activated. At least one lane marking was detected and warnings can be issued.

Lane departure warning, refer to page 170.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: Lane Departure Warning

The indicator light illuminates: the system is activated. At least one lane marking was detected and warnings can be issued.

Lane departure warning, refer to page 170.

Blue lights

High beams

High beams are switched on. High beams, refer to page 106.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Continuous display

Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the fault is eliminated. If several faults occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively.

The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed again automatically.

Temporary display

Some Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check Control messages are stored and can be displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check Control messages

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Tilt the Controller to the left.
4. Check Control"
5. Select the desired text message.

Display

Check Control

At least one Check Control message is displayed or stored.

Text messages

Text messages in combination with an icon in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator/warning lights.

Supplementary text messages

Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up via Check Control.

With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the control display.

Depending on the Check Control message, further help can be selected.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Tilt the Controller to the left.
4. Check Control"
5. Select the desired text message.
6. Select the desired setting.

Messages after trip completion

Certain messages displayed while driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off.

Fuel gauge

Principle

The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed.

General information

Vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary.

Information on refueling, refer to page 246.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

The arrow beside the fuel pump icon shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: display

The arrow beside the fuel pump icon shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.

Indicator light in the instrument cluster

The yellow indicator light illuminates, once the fuel reserve is reached.

Tachometer

Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect the engine.

Odometer and trip odometer

Principle

The total kilometers driven and the kilometers driven since the last reset are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Instrument cluster without additional functions: reset trip distance

Press the button.

- The odometer is displayed when the ignition is switched off.

- When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: reset trip distance

Press the button.

- The odometer is displayed when the ignition is switched off.

- When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset.

Outside temperature

General information

If the indicator drops to +37 °F/+3 °C, a signal sounds.

A Check Control message is displayed.

There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Safety information

Warning

Even at temperatures above +37 °F/+3 °C there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on bridges or shady sections of the road. There is a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to the weather conditions at low temperatures.

Display

The outside temperature is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Time

The time is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Set the time on the Central Information Display (CID), refer to page 47.

Date

The date is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Set the date on the Central Information Display (CID), refer to page 47.

Range

General information

When the remaining range is low:

• A Check Control message is displayed briefly.
• The remaining range is shown on the on-board computer.
• With a sporty driving style, for instance fast cornering, the engine function is not always ensured.

The Check Control message appears continuously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel promptly.

Display

Display the current range in the on-board computer, refer to page 136.

Instrument cluster with extended functionality: The current range is permanently displayed in the instrument cluster.

Current consumption

Principle

Displays the current fuel consumption. Check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmentally-friendly manner.

Display

The current consumption can be displayed on the on-board computer, refer to page 136.

Service notifications

Principle

The function displays the service notifications and the corresponding maintenance scopes.

General information

After the ignition is switched on the instrument cluster briefly displays available distance travelled or time to the next scheduled maintenance.

A service advisor can read out the current service notifications from the vehicle key.

Display

Detailed information on service notifications

More information on the type of service required may be displayed on the control display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Tilt the Controller to the left.
4. "Service required" Maintenance work and legally mandated inspections are displayed.
5. Select an entry to call up detailed information.

Icons

Icons Description

	No service is currently required.
	The time for recommended maintenance or a legally mandated inspection is approaching.
	Service interval is exceeded.

Entering appointment dates

Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle inspections.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Tilt the Controller to the left.

4. "Service required"
5. "Vehicle inspection"
6. "Date:"
7. Select the desired setting.

Automatic Service Request

Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections is automatically sent to your authorized service center before the vehicle is due for service.

You can check when your authorized service center was notified.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Tilt the Controller to the left.
4. "Teleservice Call"

Gear shift indicator

Principle

The system recommends the most efficient gear for the current driving situation.

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, the gear shift indicator is active in the manual mode of the Steptronic transmission and with manual transmission.

Suggestions to upshift or downshift are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Manual transmission: displaying

Example Description

Efficient gear is set.

Depending on the equipment version, shift to a more efficient gear.

Steptronic transmission: displaying

Example Description

Efficient gear is set.

Depending on the equipment version, shift to a more efficient gear.

Speed Limit Info

Speed Limit Info

Principle

Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum permitted speed in the instrument cluster.

General information

The camera at the base of the interior mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra icons for wet road conditions, etc., are also detected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as

from the rain sensor, and will be displayed depending on the situation.

With the navigation system, the system takes into account the information stored in the navigation data and also displays speed limits present on routes without signs.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Display

Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed Limit Info is displayed permanently in the instrument cluster or via the on-board computer.

Press button on the turn signal lever several times, if needed.

Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Speed Limit Info

The last speed limit detected.

With navigation system: Speed Limit Info is not available.

Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the Head-up display.

System limits

The system function may be limited and may provide incorrect information in the following situations:

- In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.

- When traffic signs are fully or partially concealed by objects, stickers or paint.

- When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.

• When driving toward bright lights or strong reflections.
• When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged up, dirty or covered by a sticker, etc.
• In the event of incorrect detection by the camera.
• If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect.
• In areas not covered by the navigation system.
• When roads deviate from the navigation, such as due to changes in road layout.
• When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker.
• If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
• When traffic signs that are valid for a parallel road are detected.
  – During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.

Selection lists

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the buttons on the steering wheel and the display in the instrument cluster can be used to display or use the following:

• Current audio source.
• Phone redial.
• Turn on voice activation system.

Activating a list and adjusting the setting

Button on the steering wheel	Function
	Move selection up.
	Move selection down.
	Confirm the selec-tion.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: display

On-board computer

Principle

The on-board computer displays different vehicle data in the instrument cluster, such as average values.

Calling up information

Press the button on the turn signal lever. Information is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Information at a glance

Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information:

• Range.
• GREEN Info.

When GREEN Mode is activated.

• Average consumption, fuel.
  – Average consumption since delivery from the factory.
• Current consumption, fuel.
• Average speed.
• Date.
• Engine temperature display.
• With equipment version with Head-up display and navigation:

Distance to destination.

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

- With equipment version with Head-up display and navigation:

Arrival time.

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

- Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Speed Limit Info.

• Vehicle speed.
• Trip odometer.

The unit of measurement of some information can be changed.

Setting units of measurement, refer to page 48.

Selecting information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select what information from the onboard computer can be accessed in the instrument cluster.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Information in detail

Range

Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel.

The range is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km.

GREEN info

The achieved range extension may be displayed as a bonus range.

Average fuel consumption

The average consumption is calculated for the period while the engine is running.

The average consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the on-board computer.

Average speed

Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped are not included in the calculation of the average speed.

Resetting average values

Press and hold the button on the turn signal lever.

Engine temperature display

Principle

The current engine temperature, based on a combination of coolant and engine oil temperature is displayed. As soon as the optimum operating temperature has been attained, the indicator is in the center position.

General information

If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the engine, become too hot, a Check Control message is displayed too.

When the engine temperature is too high, a red indicator light is displayed.

When the engine oil temperature is too high, a red indicator light is displayed.

To check the coolant level, refer to page 279.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: display

Distance to destination

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the distance remaining to the destination is displayed if a destination is entered in the navigation system before the trip is started.

The distance to the destination is adopted automatically.

Arrival time

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the estimated arrival time is displayed if a destination is entered in the navigation system before the trip is started.

The prerequisite is that the time must be correctly set.

Instrument cluster without additional functions: Speed Limit Info

Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum permitted speed in the instrument cluster.

On-board computer on the control display

Principle

The on-board computer displays different vehicle data on the control display, such as average values.

General information

Two types of on-board computers are available on the control display:

- "Onboard info": average values, such as the consumption, are displayed. The values can be reset individually.

- "Trip computer": the values deliver an overview of a specific distance covered and can be reset as often as necessary.

Calling up the on-board computer or trip computer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the on-board computer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"

Resetting the trip computer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4. Tilt the Controller to the left, if needed.
5. "Reset": all values are reset.
6. "A"tomatic reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has come to a standstill.
7. If necessary, "OK"

Driving Excitement

Principle

On the control display, sport instruments can be displayed, and the vehicle condition can be checked before the use of the SPORT program.

Sport instruments

General information

On the control display, values for power and torque are displayed.

Displaying sport instruments

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sport displays"
4. "Sports instruments"

Via MINI Driving Modes switch:

1. Activate SPORT.
2. "Sport displays"
3. "Sports instruments"

Vehicle condition

General information

The following vehicle and surrounding area data is automatically checked and evaluated in succession:

• Range.
• Engine temperature.
• Outside temperature.
• SPORT program state.

Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle condition is displayed.

Checking vehicle condition

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sport displays"

4. "Vehicle and surroundings"
   Via the MINI Driving Modes switch:

5. Activate SPORT.

6. "Sport displays"
7. "Vehicle and surroundings"

Speed warning

Principle

The system can be used to set a speed limit. A warning will be issued when this speed limit is exceeded.

General information

The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.

Adjusting

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.

Activate/deactivate

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"

Applying current speed as the speed warning

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"

LED ring on the central instrument cluster

Principle

The LED ring displays light animations to represent specific functions.

Basic displays

Basic functions, for instance the tachometer, can be set to be displayed continually if so desired.

Event displays

Functions that are only displayed temporarily, for instance the volume or temperature settings, can be set as event displays.

Several vehicle assistance functions can also be displayed on the LED ring. This display corresponds with the displays of the function in the respective display.

Example: tachometer

Like the tachometer in the instrument cluster, the light animations of the tachometer's basic display show the current RPMs and the respective RPM warning thresholds.

Display

• Arrow 1: current RPM.
• Arrow 2: Advance warning zone.
• Arrow 3: warning field.

Switching on/off LED ring

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Center Instrument"

Adjusting the LED ring

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Basic display" or "Event display"
6. Select the desired setting.

Setting the brightness

The brightness can be adjusted when night lighting is active in the instrument cluster. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

MINI Head-up display

Principle

The Head-up display projects important information in the driver's field of view, for instance the speed.

General information

Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-up display. For additional information, see the chapter on care.

Safety information

Warning

When extending and retracting the projection screen of the Head-up display, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the projection screen is clear when extending and retracting.

NOTICE

The Head-up display consists of sensitive components that can easily be scraped or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not place any objects on the Head-up display, attach to system components or plug into the system. Do not move the moving parts manually.

Overview

The Head-up display is switched on.

Switching the Head-up display on/off

When switching on, the projection screen of the Head-up display is extended. When switching off, the projection screen of the Head-up display is retracted again.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"

5. "Head-Up Display"

Display

Overview

The following information is displayed on the Head-up display:

- Vehicle speed.

- Navigation instructions.

- Check Control messages.

- Selection list from the instrument cluster.

- Driver assistance systems.

Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-up display

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Displayed information"
6. Select the desired displays in the Head-up display.

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the brightness

The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient brightness.

The base setting can be adjusted manually.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.

When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up display can be adjusted using the instrument lighting, refer to page 149.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Adjusting the height

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Height"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is reached.
7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the rotation

The screen of the Head-up display can be rotated around its own axis.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Rotation"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is selected.
7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Display visibility

The visibility of the displays in the Head-up display is influenced by the following factors:

• Certain seat positions.
• Objects on the cover of the Head-up display.
• Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
• Wet road.
• Unfavorable light conditions.

John Cooper Works: sport displays in the Head-up display

General information

The sport displays in the Head-up display assist with a sporty driving style.

Turning on

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Displayed information"
6. "Sport displays"

With navigation system: if the sport displays are switched on, no navigation content will be displayed on the Head-up display.

Display

1 Vehicle speed
2 Shift lights
3 Gear display
4 Current RPM
5 Warning field, speed

Shift lights

Principle

The Shift lights in the Head-up display indicates the optimum shift point. Thus, with a sporty driving style, the best possible vehicle acceleration is achieved.

Functional requirements

- Steptronic Sport transmission:

Manual mode M/S and, if necessary Dynamic Traction Control are activated.

- Press the accelerator pedal all the way down.

Display

Successive gray illuminated fields indicate the upcoming shift point.

Upshift immediately when the red fields illuminate.

When the maximum RPM is reached, the entire display flashes red and the fuel supply is interrupted in order to protect the engine.

Vehicle status

General information

The status can be displayed and actions performed for several systems.

Going to the vehicle status

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Tilt the Controller to the left.

Information at a glance

Icons Description

(1)	"Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the flat tire monitor, refer to page 160.
(2)	"Tire Pressure Monitor": status of the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 155.
	"Engine oil level": electronic oil-level check, refer to page 275.
⚠️	"Check Control": Check Control messages are stored in the background and can be displayed on the control display. Displaying stored Check Control messages, refer to page 129.
	"Service required": displaying service notifications, refer to page 132.
	"Teleservice Call"

Lights

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Overview

Switches in the vehicle

The light switch element is located next to the steering wheel.

Icon Function

Bad weather light.

Automatic headlight control.

Cornering light.

Lights off.

Daytime driving lights.

Icon Function

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Parking lights, low beams and roadside parking lights

General information

Switch position: 0, 3D, 30

If the driver's door is opened when the ignition is switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off.

Parking lights

Switch position: EDO

The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.

Do not use the parking lights for extended periods; otherwise, the battery may become discharged and it would then be impossible to start the engine.

When parking, switch on the one-sided roadside parking light, refer to page 146.

Low beams

Switch position: D

The low beams illuminate when the ignition is switched on.

Canada: roadside parking light

Principle

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Turning on

With radio-ready state switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Turning off

Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Welcome lights and pathway lighting

Welcome lights

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment and the ambient brightness, individual lighting functions may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked.

Activate/deactivate

Switch position:

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "Welcome lights"

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Pathway lighting

General information

The low beams stay illuminated for a particular time if the high beams are switched on after radio-ready state is switched off.

Canada: the low beams stay illuminated for a particular time if the headlight flasher is switched on after radio-ready state is switched off.

Setting the duration

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Set the duration.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Automatic headlight control

Principle

The low beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness, for example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is precipitation.

General information

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be turned on.

Activating

Switch position:

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.

System limits

The automatic headlight control cannot replace your personal judgment of lighting conditions.

For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn the lights on manually.

Daytime driving lights

General information

Switch position:

- 0 ≡C ^A

- Depending on the national-market version: ☑☐☐

The daytime driving lights illuminate when the ignition is switched on.

Depending on the national-market version: after switching off the ignition, the parking lights will illuminate in position

Activate/deactivate

In some countries, daytime driving lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deactivate the daytime running lights.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the currently used vehicle key.

Cornering light

General information

Switch position:

In tight curves, for instance on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional cornering light is switched on that illuminates the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed.

The cornering light is automatically switched on depending on the steering-wheel angle or, where applicable, the use of turn signals.

When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may be automatically switched on regardless of the steering-wheel angle.

Adaptive headlight range control

The adaptive headlight range control feature balances out acceleration and braking processes as well as the vehicle load conditions in order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic. Illumination of the road is optimized.

Automatic High Beam Assistant

Principle

The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects other road users early on and automatically switches the high beams on or off depending on the traffic situation.

General information

The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the

low speed range, the high beams are not switched on by the system.

The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.

The high beams can be switched on and off manually at any time.

Activate/deactivate

Switch position, depending on the vehicle equipment: ☐, ☐D

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.

The headlights are automatically changed between low beams and high beams.

The blue indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the system switches on the high beams.

The Automatic High Beam Assistant is deactivated when manually switching the high beams on and off, refer to page 106.

To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever.

System limits

The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot replace the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. In situations that require this, therefore dim manually.

The system is not fully functional in the following situations, and driver intervention may be necessary:

• In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation.
• When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
• In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on highways.
• In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the presence of highly reflective signs.
• When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged up, dirty or covered with stickers, etc.

Fog lights

Bad weather light

Principle

The bad weather light ensures optimized illumination of the roadway in poor visibility, such as fog or rain. The light distribution of the low beams is adapted to the visibility.

Functional requirement

The automatic headlight control must be activated before switching on the bad weather light.

Turning on/off

Press the button.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features:

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the bad weather light is switched on.

Instrument lighting

Functional requirement

The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to set the brightness.

Adjusting

Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel.

Interior lights

General information

Depending on the equipment, the interior lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and courtesy lights are controlled automatically.

The brightness of some of these lights is influenced by the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting.

Overview

1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
3 Ambient light

Switching the interior lights on/off

Press the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button and hold for approx. 3 seconds.

Switching the reading lights on and off manually

Press the button.

The reading lights are located in the front next to the interior lights.

Ambient light

General information

Depending on the equipment version, lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the car's interior.

Activating/deactivating

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Interior lighting"

5. "Ambient lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Changing color

Push the switch forward or back: manual color change.

Press the switch forward or backward and hold for approx. 3 seconds until the Ambient Light

flashes several times: automatic color change. Push the switch again to end color changes.

The colors of the Ambient Light depend on the respectively set color world, refer to page 49.

Setting the brightness

Depending on the equipment, the brightness of the ambient light can be adjusted via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the control display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.

Safety

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag

5 Knee airbag

Front airbags

Front airbags help protect the driver and the front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which seat belts alone would not provide adequate protection.

Side airbag

In the event of a side collision, the side airbag protects the side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbag

In the event of a side collision, the head airbag protects the head.

Ejection Mitigation

The head airbag system is designed as an ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants through side windows during rollovers or side collision events.

Knee airbag

Depending on the national-market version: The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of a frontal impact.

Protective effect

Airbags are not deployed in every impact situation, for instance in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.

Information on optimum protective effect of the airbags

Warning

If the seat position is incorrect or the deployment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag system cannot provide protection as intended and may cause additional injuries due to deployment. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Follow the information on achieving the optimum protective effect of the airbag system.

• Keep a distance from the airbags.
• Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is deployed.
• Adjust seat and steering wheel so that hands can be crossed over the steer-

ing wheel. Select the settings so that the shoulder rests against the backrest when crossing the hands and the upper body is as far back as possible while still maintaining a comfortable grip on the steering wheel.

• Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., with their feet and legs in the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.
• Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag.
• There should be no additional persons, animals or objects between an airbag and a person.
• Dashboard and windshield on the passenger's side must stay clear - do not attach adhesive film or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables, for instance for navigation devices or mobile phones.
• Do not bond the airbag cover panels with adhesive, do not cover them or modify them in any way.
• Do not use the cover of the front air- bag on the passenger's side as a storage area.
• Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or other objects to the front seats that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags.
• Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.
• Never modify either the individual components or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, and the seats.
• Do not disassemble the airbag system.

Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.

The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.

Vehicle modifications for a person with disabilities may affect the air bag system; contact MINI Customer Relations for further information.

Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.

Operational readiness of the airbag system

Safety information

Warning

Individual components can be hot after deployment of the airbag system. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch individual components.

Warning

Improperly executed work can lead to failure, malfunction or unintentional deployment of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the airbag system might not deploy as intended despite the accident severity. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the airbag system checked, repaired, disassembled, and scrapped by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct function

When the ignition is switched on, the warning light in the instrument cluster illuminates briefly, thereby indicating the operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the seat belt tensioners.

Airbag system fault

- Warning light does not come on when the ignition is switched on.

- The warning light illuminates continuously.

Have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags

Principle

The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's resistance.

Front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger's side are activated or deactivated.

General information

Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, refer to the safety information and instructions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children.

Safety information

Warning

To ensure the front passenger airbag function, the system must be able to detect whether a person is sitting in the front passenger seat. The entire seat surface must be used for this purpose. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the footwell.

Fault of the automatic deactivation system

When transporting older children and adults, the front passenger airbags may be

deactivated in certain seat positions. In this case, the indicator light for the front passenger airbags illuminates.

In this case, change the seat position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator light goes out.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear seat.

To enable accurate recognition of the occupied seat surface

• Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically determined to be safe for use on the front passenger seat.
• Do not place any electronic devices on the front passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it.
• Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.
• No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator light for the front passenger airbags

The indicator light for the front passenger airbags indicates the operating state of the front passenger airbags.

The light indicates whether the airbags are either activated or deactivated.

- The indicator light illuminates when a child is properly seated in a child restraint system or when the seat is empty. The airbags on the passenger's side are not activated.

- The indicator light does not illuminate when, for instance, a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the passenger's side are activated.

Detected child restraint systems

The system generally detects children seated in a child restraint system, particularly in child restraint systems required by NHTSA at the point in time when the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child restraint system, make sure that the indicator light for the front passenger airbags illuminates. This indicates that the child restraint system has been detected and the front passenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and front passenger airbag

The power that deploys the driver's/front passenger airbags depends on the position of the driver's/front passenger seat.

To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon as a relevant Check Control message is displayed. A message also appears on the control display.

Calibrating the front seats

Warning

There is a danger of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the travel path of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

An appropriate Check Control message is displayed.

1. Move the respective seat all the way forward.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. The seat moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired seat position.

The calibration procedure is completed when the Check Control message disappears.

If the message continues to be displayed, repeat the calibration.

If the message does not disappear after a repeat calibration, have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

Tire pressure monitor

Principle

The system monitors tire pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

General information

Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and, depending on the model, the tire temperature.

Further information and instructions on using the system can also be found under Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 250.

Functional requirements

The following prerequisites must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable notification of a tire pressure loss is not assured:

• After a tire or wheel change, a reset was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure.
• After the tire inflation pressure was adjusted to a new value, a reset was performed.
• Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.

Status display

Current status

The system status can be displayed on the control display, e.g., whether or not the system is active.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
   The current status is displayed.

Tire conditions

General information

Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a text message on the control display.

All wheels green

System is active and will issue a warning related to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

One to four yellow wheels

A flat tire or major tire pressure loss has occurred in the indicated tires.

Gray wheels

It may not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.

Possible causes:

- Malfunction.

- The system is being reset.

Additional information

The status control display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures. The values shown are instantaneous measurements and may vary depending on driving or weather conditions.

Resetting the system

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Reset tire pressure: "Perform reset".
6. Drive off.

The wheels are displayed in gray and the following is displayed: "Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor...".

After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values. The resetting process is completed automatically while driving.

After successful completion of the reset, the tires appear in green on the control display and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label for recommended pressures." is displayed.

You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue driving the reset resumes automatically.

Messages

General information

A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or no tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Runflat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information on runflat tires and continued driving with these tires.

If a tire inflation pressure check is required

Message

An icon with a Check Control message appears on the control display.

Icon Possible cause

The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was done.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Inflation was not carried out according to specifications.

The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last reset.

Measure

1. Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
2. Reset the system.

If the tire inflation pressure is too low

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, an icon with a Check Control message appears on the control display.

Icon Possible cause

There is a tire pressure loss.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and drive moderately. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance filling station, check and correct the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, if necessary.
3. Reset the system.

If there is a significant tire pressure loss

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, an icon with the affected tire appears in a Check Control message on the control display.

Icon Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major tire pressure loss.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with standard tires or runflat tires.

Runflat tires, refer to page 261, are labeled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Standard tires

1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire pressure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure display of a flat tire kit.

If the tire pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the flat tire monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If tire damage cannot be identified, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

1. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealing compound, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the wheel elec-

tronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.

Runflat tires

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a runflat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced directional stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

Possible distance traveled with a depressurized tire

The possible distance which may be safely traveled varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, outside temperature. The distance traveled may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, the possible distance traveled may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following:

• Greater likelihood of skidding of the vehicle.
• Longer braking distances.
• Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

System limits

Temperature

The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's temperature.

Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire temperature, thus increasing the tire inflation pressure.

The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again.

These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply.

Sudden tire pressure loss

The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances.

Failure performing a reset

The system does not function properly if a reset has not been carried out, for instance a flat tire is reported though tire inflation pressures are correct.

Malfunction

The yellow warning light flashes and is then illuminated continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. It may not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.

Examples and recommendations in the following situations:

• Wheel without TPM wheel electronics, e.g., an emergency wheel, is mounted: Have it checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.
• Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
• The system was unable to complete the reset. Perform a system reset again.
• Fault caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If the vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, the vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. The vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on the vehicle to ensure that the replace-

ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Flat tire monitor

Principle

The system detects tire pressure loss on the basis of rotation speed differences between the individual wheels while driving.

In the event of a tire pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. The difference will be detected and reported as a flat tire.

The system does not measure the actual inflation pressure in the tires.

Functional requirements

The following prerequisites must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable notification of a tire pressure loss is not assured:

- After a tire or wheel change, an initialization was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure.

- After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new value, an initialization was performed.

Status display

The current status of the flat tire monitor can be displayed, e.g., whether the flat tire monitor is active.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

The status is displayed.

Initialization required

An initialization must be performed in the following situations:

- After the tire inflation pressure has been adjusted.

- After a tire or wheel change.

Performing initialization

When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. ("Flat Tire Monitor")

4. Start the engine but do not drive off.

5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset".

6. Drive off.

The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time.

The initialization automatically continues when driving continues.

Messages

General information

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or no tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Runflat tires can maintain limited stability. There

is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information on runflat tires and continued driving with these tires.

Indication of a flat tire

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, an icon with a Check Control message appears on the control display.

Icon Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major tire pressure loss.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with standard tires or runflat tires.

Runflat tires, refer to page 261, are la-beled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Standard tires

1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire pressure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure display of a flat tire kit.

If the tire pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the flat tire monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If tire damage cannot be identified, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

1. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealing compound, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.

Runflat tires

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a runflat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced directional stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the flat tire monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible distance traveled with a depressurized tire

The possible distance which may be safely traveled varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, outside temperature. The distance traveled may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, the possible distance traveled may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following:

• Greater likelihood of skidding of the vehicle.
• Longer braking distances.
• Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

System limits

The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations:

- A natural, even tire pressure loss in all four tires will not be recognized. There-

fore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly.

• Sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recognized in advance.
• When the system has not been initialized.
• When driving on a snowy or slippery road.
• Sporty driving style: slip on traction wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
• When driving with snow chains.

Intelligent Safety

Principle

Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance systems.

The intelligent safety systems can help prevent an imminent collision.

• Forward Collision Warning with city collision mitigation, refer to page 163.
• Pedestrian Warning with City light braking function, refer to page 167.
• Lane departure warning, refer to page 170.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take

over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or responses, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

When towing with Intelligent Safety systems enabled or Cruise Control switched on, individual functions may not work correctly. There is a risk of accident. Switch off all Intelligent Safety systems and Cruise Control before towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Turning on/off

Some Intelligent Safety systems are automatically active after every departure. Some Intelligent Safety systems activate according to the last setting.

Press button briefly:

- The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

- LED illuminates orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

- The LED illuminates green.

Hold down button:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

- The LED goes out.

Forward Collision Warning with city collision mitigation

Principle

This system helps to prevent accidents. In the event of an accident, the system helps by reducing impact speed.

The system sounds a warning for a possible risk of collision and activates brakes independently, if needed.

The automatic brake intervention occurs with limited force and duration.

A camera at the base of the interior mirror controls the system.

The Forward Collision Warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated. The system considers the driver's vehicle handling when responding. If an active driving style is detected, warnings and brake interventions occur less frequently.

General information

The system issues a two-phase warning of an imminent risk of collision at speeds from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings may vary with the current driving situation.

If necessary, a brake intervention will occur. Depending on the equipment and national-market version, the brake intervention will occur up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h or up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h.

Detection range

Objects that the system can detect are taken into account.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or responses, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

When towing with Intelligent Safety systems enabled or Cruise Control switched on, individual functions may not work correctly. There is a risk of accident. Switch off all Intelligent Safety systems and Cruise Control before towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Turning on/off

Turning on automatically

The system is automatically active when the vehicle is turned on.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

- The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

- LED illuminates orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

- The LED illuminates green.

Hold down button:

• All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.
• The LED goes out.

Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set via the Central Information Display (CID).

1. My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
5. Select the desired setting.

The selected warning time is stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Warning with light braking function

Display

If there is a risk of collision with a detected vehicle, a warning light is shown on the instrument cluster and Head-up display.

Icon Measure

Warning light illuminates red: Advance warning.

Brake and increase distance.

Warning light flashes red and acoustic signal sounds: Acute warning.

Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary.

Prewarning

This prewarning is provided, for instance when there is impending risk of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking as warranted.

Acute warning with light braking function

An acute warning is displayed when there is an imminent risk of collision due to the vehicle approaching another object at a high speed.

The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is assisted by a minor automatic brake intervention in a possible risk of collision.

Acute warnings may be provided even when there has been no prewarning.

Brake intervention

The warning prompts the driver to intervene. When a warning occurs, the maximum braking force is used when the brake is applied. In order to activate the brake booster, you must apply the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with a minor brake intervention. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.

Manual transmission: during a brake intervention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down.

The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal with sufficient force or by actively moving the steering wheel.

The system's ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Note the limitations of the detection range and functional limitations.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

Due to its limits, the system may not react, or it may react too late or in a manner that is not consistent with normal use. There may be a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.

Detection range

The system's detection capability is limited. Thus, a system response might not come or might come late.

The following situations may not be detected, for example:

• Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed.
• Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
• Vehicles with an unusual rear view.
• Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following situations:

• In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
• On tight curves.
• If the camera field of view or the wind-shield is dirty or covered.
• If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
• Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button.

– During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.
- If there are constant blinding glares because of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky.

Warning sensitivity

The more sensitive the warning settings are, the more warnings are displayed. Therefore, there may also be an excess of unwarranted warnings and responses.

Pedestrian Warning with City light braking function

Principle

This system helps to prevent accidents with pedestrians.

When driving in the city speed range, the system will issue a warning if there is imminent risk of a collision with pedestrians, and support this with a light braking function.

The camera at the base of the interior mirror controls the system.

General information

In sufficiently bright conditions, the system issues a warning of a possible risk of collision with pedestrians and assists with brake intervention just before a collision in the speed range from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h.

The system reacts to people who are within the detection range of the system.

Detection range

The detection range in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas:

• Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle.
• Extended area, arrows 2, to the right and left of the central area.

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located within the central area. A warning is issued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or responses, or these may

be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

When towing with Intelligent Safety systems enabled or Cruise Control switched on, individual functions may not work correctly. There is a risk of accident. Switch off all Intelligent Safety systems and Cruise Control before towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Turning on/off

Turning on automatically

The system is automatically active when the vehicle is turned on.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

- The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

- LED illuminates orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

- The LED illuminates green.

Hold down button:

• All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.
• The LED goes out.

Warning with light braking function

Display

If there is a risk of collision with a detected person, a warning light is shown on the instrument cluster and Head-up display.

A red warning light is displayed and an acoustic warning sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Brake intervention

The warning prompts the driver to intervene. When a warning occurs, the maximum braking force is used when the brake is applied. In order to activate the brake booster, you must apply the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with a minor brake intervention. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.

Manual transmission: during a brake intervention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down.

The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal with sufficient force or by actively moving the steering wheel.

The system's ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Note the limitations of the detection range and functional limitations.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

Due to its limits, the system may not react, or it may react too late or in a manner that is not consistent with normal use. There may be a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.

Detection range

The detection capability of the camera is limited.

Thus, a warning might not be issued or be issued late.

The following situations may not be detected, for example:

• Partially covered pedestrians.
• Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour.
• Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
• Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited or may not be available in the following situations:

• In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
• On tight curves.
• If the camera field of view or the wind-shield is dirty or covered.

• If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

• Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button.

• During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.
• If there are constant blinding glares because of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky.
• When it is dark outside.

Lane departure warning

Principle

The lane departure warning alerts when the vehicle on roads with lane markings is about to leave the lane.

General information

Depending on the country version, the system issues a warning at speeds between 35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h.

Warnings are issued by means of a steering wheel vibration. The time of the warning may vary depending on the current driving situation.

The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set before exiting the lane.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing road and traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in response to a warning.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or responses, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Turning on/off

Turning on automatically

The lane departure warning is automatically activated after departure, if the function was switched on the last time the engine was stopped.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

- The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

- LED illuminates orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

- The LED illuminates green.

Hold down button:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

- The LED goes out.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

Indicator light illuminates green: At least one lane boundary line has been detected and warnings may be issued.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: display

Indicator light illuminates green: At least one lane boundary line has been detected and warnings may be issued.

Output of warning

If you leave the lane

If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates.

If the turn signal is switched on before changing the lane, a warning is not issued.

End of warning

The warning is canceled in the following situations:

- Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.

- When returning to your own lane.

- When braking hard.

- When flashing.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

Due to its limits, the system may not react, or it may react too late or in a manner that is not consistent with normal use.

There may be a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following situations:

• In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
• In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas.
• When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water.
• In tight curves or on narrow roads.
• When lane markings are covered by objects.
• When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.
• When driving toward bright lights.
• When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged up, dirty or covered with stickers, etc.
  – During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.

Manual Speed Limiter

Principle

The system can be used to set a speed limit, for instance to prevent the vehicle from exceeding speed limits.

General information

The system can limit the speed, starting at a value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be driven at any speed below the set speed limit.

Exceeding the speed limit

In special situations, the speed limit can be exceeded by intentional acceleration. When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit, a warning is issued.

No brake intervention

If the set speed limit is reached or unintentionally exceeded, such as when driving downhill, the vehicle is not actively braked.

When the speed limit is set during a trip to a value below the driving speed, the vehicle coasts until its driving speed drops below the set speed limit.

Overview

Steering wheel buttons, left

Button Function

System on/off.

Increase the speed limit.

Reduce the speed limit.

Operation

Turning on

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The current speed is accepted as the speed limit.

If the system is switched on while the vehicle is stationary or driving at low speeds, 20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.

The set speed is displayed under the LIMIT or LIM indicator.

When the speed limit is activated, Dynamic Stability Control is switched on as necessary.

Turning off

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The system switches off automatically in the following situations, for example:

• When shifting into reverse gear.
• When the engine is switched off.
• When Cruise Control is switched on.
• When activating Dynamic Traction Control or deactivating Dynamic Stability Control.

The displays turn off.

Changing the speed limit

+ or - button: press up or down repeatedly until the desired speed limit is set.

• • or - button: each time it is pressed to the resistance point, the speed limit increases or decreases by 1 mph, 1 km/h.
• • or - button: each time it is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

When the speed limit is set during a trip to a value below the current speed, the vehicle coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.

Exceeding the speed limit

The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally.

Press the accelerator pedal all the way down to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.

When the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit, the limit is automatically reactivated.

Warning when the speed limit is exceeded

Visual warning

If the set speed limit is exceeded, the LIMIT or LIM indicator flashes while the vehicle speed is greater than the speed limit.

Acoustic warning

• If the speed limit is exceeded unintentionally, a signal sounds.
• When the speed limit is reduced to below the vehicle speed while driving, a signal sounds after approx. 30 seconds.
• When the speed limit is intentionally exceeded by stepping on the accelerator pedal all the way down, there is no signal.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The desired speed is displayed under the LIMIT indicator.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features:

The desired speed is displayed under the LIM indicator.

• The indicator does not illuminate: the system is switched off.
• The indicator illuminates green: the system is active.
• Display flashes green: set speed limit exceeded.

Displays in the Head-up display

The information from the Speed Limiter can also be displayed in the Head-up display.

Fatigue alert

Principle

The system can detect decreasing alertness or fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it is recommended that the driver takes a break.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing one's physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not be detected in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.

Function

The system is switched on each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off.

After starting the trip, the system is trained to the driver, so that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be detected.

This procedure takes the following criteria into account:

• Personal driving style, for instance steering behavior.
• Driving conditions, for instance time, length of trip.

The system is active starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also display a break recommendation.

Break recommendation

If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the control display with the recommendation to take a break.

A break recommendation is displayed only once during an uninterrupted trip.

After a break, another break recommendation cannot be displayed until after approximately 45 minutes.

System limits

System functionality may be limited. If the function is limited, either no warning is issued or an incorrect warning is issued. The system function may be limited in the following situations, e.g.:

• If the time is set incorrectly.
• At a predominantly driven speed below approx. 43 mph/70 km/h.
• With a sporty driving style, such as during rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
• In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently.
• When the road condition is poor.
• In the event of strong side winds.

The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a break during longer trips on highways.

PostCrash - iBrake

Principle

In the event of an accident, the system can bring the vehicle to a halt automatically without intervention by the driver in certain situations. This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences thereof.

At standstill

After coming to a halt, the brake is released automatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Harder vehicle deceleration

In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the automatic braking allows.

To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake. For a brief period, the brake pressure will be higher than the brake pressure that is achieved by the automatic brake function. This interrupts automatic braking.

Canceling automatic braking

It can be necessary to interrupt automatic braking in certain situations, for instance for an evasive maneuver.

Cancel automatic braking:

- By depressing the brake pedal.

- By pressing the accelerator pedal.

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Antilock Braking System

Principle

The Antilock Braking System prevents locking of the wheels during braking.

The vehicle maintains its steerability even during emergency braking, which increases the active driving safety.

General information

The Antilock Braking System is ready every time the drive-ready state is turned on.

Malfunction

The warning light on the instrument cluster illuminates.

A Check Control message is displayed.

• The Antilock Braking System system is not available.
• The ability to steer is restricted during full braking.

Have checked immediately by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Brake assistant

When you apply the brake pedal rapidly, this system automatically boosts braking assistance to the furthest possible extent. It reduces the braking distance to a minimum during emergency braking. This system utilizes all of the capabilities provided by the Antilock Braking System.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during full braking.

Dynamic Stability Control

Principle

Within the physical limits, the system helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine power and by applying brake intervention to the individual wheels.

General information

The Dynamic Stability Control will detect, e.g., the following unstable driving conditions:

• Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.
• Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which can lead to understeering.

Dynamic Traction control, refer to page 178, is a version of the Dynamic Stability Control where drive power is optimized.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

When driving with a roof load, e.g., roof bars, the vehicle's center of gravity is higher. This increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situations. There may be a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Drive with roof load only with activated Dynamic Stability Control.

Display in the instrument cluster

Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stability Control is regulating the drive and brake power. The vehicle is stable. Reduce speed and modify your driv le to the driving circumstances.

Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability Control has failed or is initializing. Driving stabilization is restricted or has failed. If the indicator light illuminates continuously, have the vehicle checked immediately by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Deactivate Dynamic Stability Control: DSC OFF

General information

When Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, driving stability is limited when accelerating and cornering.

To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic Stability Control as soon as possible.

Deactivating the system

Press and hold this button but not longer than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator light for DSC OFF

illuminates in the instrument cluster and displays DSC OFF.

Dynamic Stability Control is switched off.

Activating the system

Press the button.

DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator

light turn off.

Displays in the instrument cluster

If the Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.

Automatic activation

If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, it is automatically activated in the following situations:

- The vehicle has a flat tire.

- When activating cruise control in the TRACTION or DSC OFF settings.

Dynamic Traction Control

Principle

The Dynamic Traction Control is a variant of the Driving Stability Control where the drive power is optimized.

The system ensures maximum drive power on unusual road conditions, for instance unplowed snow covered roads, or loose road surfaces, but with somewhat limited driving stability.

When the Dynamic Traction Control is activated, there is maximum traction. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when cornering.

Drive carefully.

A brief activation of the Dynamic Traction Control may be useful in the following exceptional situations:

• When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads.
• When driving off from deep snow or loose ground.
• When driving with snow chains.

Activating/deactivating the Dynamic Traction Control

Activating the system

Press the button.

TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF illuminates.

Deactivating the system

Press the button again.

TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator light turn off.

Adaptive suspension

Principle

The system reduces undesired vehicle movements.

The driving dynamics and driving comfort are enhanced depending on the road condition and driving style.

MINI Driving Modes switch

Principle

The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features.

Choose between three different programs.

Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch will activate the particular program.

Operating the programs

Switch Program

SPORT

MID

GREEN

MID

MID provides a balanced setting.

With each starting procedure, MID is activated using the Start/Stop button.

GREEN

Principle

GREEN provides a consistent setting to maximize range.

Activating GREEN

Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch

1. Activate GREEN.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Configure the program.
   This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

1. My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure GREEN"
5. Select the desired setting.

This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

SPORT

Principle

Consistently sporty setting of the drivetrain for greater driving agility.

Activating SPORT

Press the MINI Driving Modes switch upward until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring driving program

Settings can be made for the following driving programs in Drive mode:

- GREEN, refer to page 178.

Displays

Program selection

Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch displays a list of programs, which can be selected.

Selected program

The instrument cluster displays the selected program.

Drive-off assistant

Principle

This system supports driving off on uphill grades. The parking brake is not required.

Driving off with the drive-off assistant

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without delay.
   After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

Servotronic

Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steering function.

The system provides the steering force with more support at low speeds than at higher ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance, and makes steering firmer when driving at faster speeds.

Furthermore, the steering force adapts according to the driving program, so that a firm, sporty feel or a comfortable steering response is conveyed.

Driving comfort

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Camera-based cruise control

Principle

Using this system, a set speed and a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel.

The system maintains the set speed on clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes automatically.

If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system adjusts the speed of the vehicle so that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as the given situation allows.

The distance can be adjusted at several levels. For safety reasons, it depends on the respective speed.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: if the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive again shortly thereafter, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits.

General information

A camera on the interior mirror is used to detect vehicles driving ahead.

Depending on the vehicle settings, the cruise control settings may change under certain conditions.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Risk of accident is greater when there is a high speed differential to other vehicles, for instance in the following situations:

• When approaching a slowly moving vehicle at speed.
• Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
• When approaching stationary vehicles at speed.

There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling away.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
• On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Warning

When towing with Intelligent Safety systems enabled or Cruise Control switched on, individual functions may not work correctly. There is a risk of accident. Switch off all Intelligent Safety systems and Cruise Control before towing.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer to page 183.

Interrupt cruise control, refer to page 183.

Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 185.

Reduce distance, refer to page 184.

Increase the distance, refer to page 184.

Increase speed, refer to page 184.

Reduce speed, refer to page 184.

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's series, optional features and country specifications.

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Functional requirements

The system is best used on well-maintained roads.

The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: the system can also be activated while the vehicle is stationary.

The max. speed that can be set is 85 mph/140 km/h.

Manual transmission: Active Cruise Control is interrupted below a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. The system does not brake to a stop.

If distance control is switched off, refer to page 185, higher desired speeds can be selected as well.

Turning on/off and interrupting cruise control

Turning on

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Display in the instrument cluster illuminates.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Display in the instrument cluster illuminates. The current speed is adopted as desired speed and displayed with icon.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features:

Display in the instrument cluster illuminates. The current speed is adopted as de-

sired speed and displayed with icon.

Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed.

If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on.

Turning off

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: when switching off while stationary, depress the brake pedal simultaneously.

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The displays turn off. The stored set speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

Press the button on the steering wheel.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmission: when interrupting while stationary, depress the brake pedal simultaneously.

Interrupting automatically

The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:

• When braking manually.
• Manual transmission: when the clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not engaged.
• If selector lever position N is set.
• When Dynamic Traction Control is activated or Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
• If Dynamic Stability Control regulates the driving stability.

• If the detection range of the camera is impaired, for instance by contamination, heavy precipitation or blinding glare from the sun.

• Manual transmission: if the vehicle in front decelerates below a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

• With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: following a stationary period of approx. 3 seconds, after the vehicle was braked to a stop by the system.

Adjusting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speed

Press + or - button in the interrupted state.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the set speed.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The stored speed is displayed by the icon in the Info Display of the instrument cluster.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features:

The stored speed is displayed.

If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on.

Changing the speed

+ or - button: press until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

• • or - button: each time it is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
• • or - button: each time it is pressed past the resistance point, the

desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

+ or - button: hold down to repeat the action.

Adjusting the distance

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to the system limits, deceleration can be late. There may be a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the surrounding traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance to the traffic and weather conditions and maintain the prescribed safety distance, possibly by braking.

Reducing the distance

Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the Info Display of the instrument cluster.

Increasing the distance

Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the Info Display of the instrument cluster.

Continuing cruise control

General information

An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unwanted vehicle deceleration or acceleration may occur.

In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again:

• When the system is switched off.
• When the ignition is switched off.

Calling up the stored speed and distance

Press the button with the system interrupted. Cruise control is continued with the stored values. The instrument cluster briefly displays the selected distance.

Switching distance control on/off

Safety information

Warning

The system does not react to traffic driving ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored speed. There may be a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions and brake as needed.

Switching distance control off

Distance control can be switched off and on when driving with cruise control activated.

Press and hold this button.

Or:

Press and hold this button.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates.

To switch distance control back on, press one of the two buttons again briefly.

After changing over distance control, a Check Control message is displayed.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Set speed and stored speed

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

In addition to the indicator light, the desired speed is displayed in the Info Display.

• Display illuminates green: system is active, the display indicates the desired speed.
• Display illuminates orange: system is interrupted, the display indicates the stored speed.
• No display: system is switched off.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features:

- Display illuminates green: system is active, the display indicates the desired speed.

• Speed value is illuminated gray: system is interrupted.
• No display: system is switched off.

If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not currently fulfilled.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4

This value is set automatically after the system is switched on.

Instrument clusters without enhanced features: selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand portion of the Info Display.

Detected vehicle

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Warning light illuminates orange:

Vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features:

Vehicle icon is displayed: Vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions:

Rolling bars: the detected vehicle

has driven away.

The system does not accelerate. To accelerate, activate the system as follows:

- By briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.

- By pressing the RES CNCL button.

- By pressing the + or - button.

Indicator lights and warning lights

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Warning light flashes orange.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features:

Vehicle icon flashes.

Conditions are not adequate for the system to work.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Warning light flashes red and acoustic signal sounds:

Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary.

System interrupted without detected vehicle.

System interrupted with detected vehicle.

Displays in the Head-up display

The information from Active Cruise Control can also be displayed in the Head-up display.

System limits

Detection range

The detection capability of the system and the automatic braking performance are limited.

For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be detected.

Deceleration

The system does not decelerate in the following situations:

• For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly slow-moving road users.
• For red traffic lights.
• For cross traffic.
• For oncoming traffic.
• Unlit vehicles or vehicles with faulty lighting at night.

Merging vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle.

If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly merges into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected distance. It may not be possible to restore the selected distance in certain situations, including if you are driving significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.

With Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmission: driving off

In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off automatically; for example:

• On steep uphill grades.
• In front of bumps in the road.

In these cases, press on the accelerator pedal.

Cornering

When the set speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.

The system has a limited detection range. Situations can arise in tight curves where a vehicle driving ahead will not be detected or will be detected very late.

When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you may compensate for it by briefly accelerating. After releasing the accelerator pedal the system is reactivated and controls speed independently.

Weather

The following restrictions can occur under unfavorable weather or light conditions:

• Poorer vehicle detection.
• Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already recognized.

Examples of unfavorable weather or light conditions:

• Wet conditions.
• Snowfall.
• Slush.
• Fog.
• Glare.

Drive attentively, and react to the current surrounding traffic situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for instance by braking, steering or evading.

Engine power

The desired speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed if the system has malfunctioned or was automatically deactivated.

The system may be limited in the following situations:

• When an object was not correctly detected.
• In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
• On tight curves.
• If the camera field of view or the wind-shield is dirty or covered.
• When driving toward bright lights.
• Up to 20 seconds after the start of the engine, via the Start/Stop button.
  – During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.

Cruise Control

Principle

Using this system, a set speed can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the set speed. The system accelerates and brakes automatically as needed.

General information

The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Depending on the vehicle settings, the cruise control settings may change under certain conditions.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

The use of the system can lead to an increased risk of accidents in the following situations, for instance:

• On winding roads.
• With high traffic volume.
• On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet conditions, or on a loose road surface.

There may be a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Only use the system if driving at constant speed is possible.

Warning

When towing with Intelligent Safety systems enabled or Cruise Control switched on, individual functions may not work correctly. There is a risk of accident. Switch off all Intelligent Safety systems and Cruise Control before towing.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer to page 189.

Interrupt cruise control, refer to page 189.

Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 191.

Increase speed, refer to page 190.

Reduce speed, refer to page 190.

Turning on/off and interrupting cruise control

Turning on

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The current speed is adopted as the desired speed and is displayed with the icon in the instrument cluster.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features:

Display in the instrument cluster illuminates. The current speed is adopted as the

speed limit.

Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed.

If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on.

Turning off

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The displays turn off. The stored set speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

When active, press the button on the steering wheel.

Interrupting automatically

The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:

- When braking manually.

- If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not engaged.

- If the gear engaged is too high for the current speed.

- If selector lever position N is set.

• When Dynamic Traction Control is activated or Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
• If Dynamic Stability Control regulates the driving stability.

Adjusting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speed

Press + or - button in the interrupted state.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the set speed.

The stored speed is displayed in the instrument cluster.

If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on.

Changing the speed

+ or - button: press until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

• • or - button: each time it is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
• • or - button: each time it is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
• • or - button: press button to resistance point and hold. The vehicle accelerates or decelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the rocker switch is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Continuing cruise control

General information

An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unwanted vehicle deceleration or acceleration may occur.

Calling up the stored speed

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The stored speed is reached again and maintained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Indicator light

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the indicator light in the instrument cluster indicates whether the system is switched on.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features:

The indicator in the instrument cluster illuminates: the system is switched on.

Set speed and stored speed

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The desired speed is displayed together with the icon.

• Display illuminates green: system is active, the display indicates the desired speed.
• Display illuminates orange: system is interrupted, the display indicates the stored speed.
• No display: system is switched off.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features:

The desired speed is displayed together with the icon.

- Display illuminates green: system is active, the display indicates the desired speed.

- Display illuminates gray: system is interrupted, the display indicates the stored speed.

- No display: system is switched off.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not currently fulfilled.

System limits

Engine power

The set speed is also maintained downhill, but may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.

Park Distance Control

Principle

Park Distance Control assists with parking. The system detects objects behind the vehicle. If equipped with Park Distance Control in the front, objects in front of the vehicle are also detected. Objects that you are

approaching slowly are indicated by signal tones and a visual display.

General information

The ultrasound sensors for measuring the distances are located in the bumpers.

The range, depending on obstacles and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.

An acoustic warning is first given in the following situations:

• By the front middle sensors and the two corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the object.
• By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.
• When a collision is imminent.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's surroundings closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to high speeds when the Park Distance Control is activated, the warning can be delayed due to physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid driving off quickly while Park Distance Control is not yet active.

Overview

With front Park Distance Control: button in the vehicle

Park assistance button

Ultrasonic sensors

Ultrasonic sensors of the Park Distance Control, in the bumpers, for example.

Functional requirements

Ensure full operability:

• Do not cover sensors, for instance with stickers, bicycle racks or similar.
• Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.

Turning on/off

Turning on automatically

The system switches on automatically in the following situations:

- If selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running.

The rearview camera also switches on.

- With front Park Distance Control: when obstacles are detected behind or in front of the vehicle by Park Distance Control

and the speed is slower than approx.

2.5 mph/4 km/h.

With front Park Distance Control: automatic activation when obstacles are detected can be switched off. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC Activation": depending on the vehicle equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC Activation"

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel

The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

With front Park Distance Control: switch on/off manually

Press the park assistance button.

- On: the LED illuminates.

- Off: the LED goes out.

The rearview camera image is displayed if the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the park assistance button.

Depending on the equipment version, the system cannot be switched off manually if the reverse gear is engaged.

Warning

Signal tones

An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle is approaching an object. E.g., when an object is detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the rear left speaker.

The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals.

When the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded.

With front Park Distance Control: when objects are simultaneously located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded.

The signal tone is switched off, when selector lever position P is engaged on vehicles with Steptronic transmission.

Volume

The ratio of the volume of the Park Distance Control signal tone to the entertainment volume can be adjusted.

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Tone"

4. "Volume settings"

5. "PDC"

6. Set the desired value.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Visual warning

The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the control display. Objects that are farther away are already displayed on the control display before a signal sounds.

The display appears as soon as Park Distance Control is activated.

The detection range of the sensors is represented in colors: red, green and yellow.

When the image of the rearview camera is displayed, it is possible to switch to Park Distance Control:

"Rear view camera"

System limits

Safety information

Warning

Due to its limits, the system may not react, or it may react too late or in a manner that is not consistent with normal use. There may be a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

The detection of objects with ultrasonic measurements can run into physical limits, for instance under the following conditions:

• For small children and animals.
• For persons with certain clothing, for instance jacket.
• With external fault of the ultrasound, for instance from passing vehicles or loud machines.
• When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position.

- If cargo protrudes.

- Under certain weather conditions such as high moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.

- With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.

- With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

- With moving objects.

- With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.

- With objects with corners and sharp edges.

• With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences.
• For objects with porous surfaces.
• Low objects already displayed, for instance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.

Unwarranted warnings

The system may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range:

• In heavy rain.
• When sensors are very contaminated or covered with ice.
• When sensors are covered in snow.

- On rough road surfaces.

- On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.

- In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, for instance in underground garages.

- In automatic car washes.

- Due to heavy exhaust.

- Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance sweeping machines, steam cleaners or neon lights.

The malfunction is signaled by a continuous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultrasound sources is no longer present, the system is again fully functional.

With front Park Distance Control: to reduce unwarranted warnings, switch off automatic Park Distance Control activation on obstacle detection, for instance in car washes, see Switching on/off.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Red icon is displayed, and the detection range of the sensors is dimmed on the control display.

Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Rearview camera

Principle

The rearview camera provides assistance in reverse parking and maneuvering. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the control display.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's surroundings closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Depending on the vehicle equipment: button in the vehicle

Park assistance button

Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle of the tailgate.

The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If necessary, clean the camera lens.

Turning on/off

Turning on automatically

The system is switched on automatically if selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel

The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off manually

Press the park assistance button.

• On: the LED illuminates.
• Off: the LED goes out.

The parking assistance functions are shown on the control display.

Switching the view via the Central Information Display (CID)

If the rearview camera view is not displayed, change the view via the Central Information Display (CID):

"Rear view camera"

The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the control display

Functional requirements

• The rearview camera is switched on.
• The tailgate is fully closed.
• Keep the detection range of the camera open.

Protruding cargo or rear-mounted luggage rack that are not connected to a trailer power socket can lead to malfunctions.

Activating assistance functions

More than one assistance function can be active at the same time.

- Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"

Lanes and turning circle lines are indicated.

- Obstacle marking

"Obstacle marking"

Obstacles are marked, depending on the vehicle equipment.

Pathway lines

Pathway lines can be superimposed on the rearview camera image.

Pathway lines help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads.

Pathway lines depend on the current steering wheel angle and are continuously adjusted to steering movements.

Turning circle lines

Turning circle lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera.

Turning circle lines show the course of the smallest possible turning radius on a level road.

Only one turning circle line is displayed after the steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.

Obstacle marking

Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera.

The colored steps of the obstacle markings match the marks of the Park Distance Control.

Parking using lanes and turning circle lines

1. Position the vehicle so that the turning circle lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.

1. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning circle line.

Display settings

Brightness

With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the icon.

2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is reached and press the Controller.

Contrast

With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the icon.

2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is reached and press the Controller.

System limits

Detection of objects

Very low obstacles or high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be recognized by the system.

Depending on the equipment, some assistance functions also take into account data from the Park Distance Control.

Follow the notes in the Park Distance Control chapter.

The objects displayed on the control display may be closer than they appear. Therefore, do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display.

Automatic Parking Assistant

Principle

This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road.

General information

Automatic Parking Assistant handling is divided into three steps:

• Switching on and activating.
• Parking space search.
• Parking.

Ultrasonic sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

The Automatic Parking Assistant calculates the best possible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking operation.

System status and instructions on required actions are displayed on the control display.

A component of the Automatic Parking Assistant is Park Distance Control.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's surroundings closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

The system can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

In addition, the safety instructions of the Park Distance Control apply.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Park assistance button

Ultrasonic sensors

The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the wheel housing.

Functional requirements

Ultrasonic sensors

Ensure full operability:

• Do not cover sensors, for instance with stickers.
• Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.

For the measurement od parking spaces

• Maximum speed while driving forward approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.
• Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space

• Gaps behind an object that has a min. length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
• Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
• Minimum length of gap between two objects: own vehicle length plus approx. 3.3 ft/1.0 m.
• Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For the parking operation

• Doors and tailgate are closed.
• The parking brake is released.
• When parking in parking spaces on the driver's side, the corresponding turn signal must be switched on.

Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button

Press the park assistance button. The LED illuminates.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the control display.

P_Q Automatic Parking Assistant is activated automatically.

Switching on with reverse gear

Shift into reverse.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the control display.

To activate: "Parking Assistant"

Display on the control display

System activated/deactivated

Icon Meaning

Gray: the system is not available.

White: the system is available but not activated.

The system is activated.

Parking space search and system status

• Icon P on the vehicle image: the Automatic Parking Assistant is activated and the parking space search is active.
• Control display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the vehicle icon. When the Automatic Parking Assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are highlighted.
• The parking operation is

active. The system takes over the steering.

- Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the displays on the control display are shown in gray.

Parking using the Automatic Parking Assistant

Parking

1. Pass the park assistance button or shift into reverse gear to switch on the Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to page 199. Activate the Automatic Parking Assistant, if needed.

P Automatic Parking Assistant is activated.

1. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.

The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are displayed on the control display, refer to page 200.

1. Follow the instructions on the control display.

The Automatic Parking Assistant takes control of steering during the parking operation. The driver takes over braking and accelerating.

The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the stationary vehicle - wait for the automatic steering operation.

The end of the parking operation is indicated on the control display.

1. Adjust the parking position yourself, if needed.

Canceling manually

The Automatic Parking Assistant can be interrupted at any time:

• Press the park assistance button.
• "Parking Assistant"

Canceling automatically

The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations:

• If the driver grasps the steering wheel or takes over steering.
• If a gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the control display.
• If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.
• Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road.
• If a maximum number of parking attempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
• If Park Distance Control displays clearances that are too small.
• When changing over to other functions of the radio.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Resuming

An interrupted parking operation can be continued, if needed.

Reactivate the Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to page 199, and follow the instructions on the control display.

Turning off

The system can be switched off as follows:

- Press the park assistance button.

- Switching off the ignition.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

Due to its limits, the system may not react, or it may react too late or in a manner that is not consistent with normal use. There may be a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.

No parking assistance

The Automatic Parking Assistant does not offer assistance in the following situations:

- On tight curves.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following situations:

• On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads.
• On slippery ground.
• With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space.
• With a mounted emergency wheel.
• With ditches or edges, for instance an edge of a port.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

The detection of objects with ultrasonic measurements can run into physical limits, for instance under the following conditions:

• For small children and animals.

• For persons with certain clothing, for instance jacket.

• With external fault of the ultrasound, for instance from passing vehicles or loud machines.

• When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position.
• If cargo protrudes.
• Under certain weather conditions such as high moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
• With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.
• With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
• With moving objects.
• With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.
• With objects with corners and sharp edges.
• With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences.
• For objects with porous surfaces.
• Low objects already displayed, for instance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.
• The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking.

Tire size

The parking position may vary depending on the tire size.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed.

The Automatic Parking Assistant has malfunctioned. Have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Climate control

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the following components:

• Emission tested passenger compartment.
• Microfilter.
• Air conditioning system to control the temperature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.
  Depending on the equipment specification:
• Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.
• Automatic climate control.
• Pre-ventilation.

Air conditioning system

1 Air distribution settings
2 Air flow
3 Temperature
4 Seat heating, right 83
5 Air conditioning

6 Air recirculation mode
7 Rear window defroster
8 Heated windshield
9 Seat heating, left 83

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Turning on

Set any air flow.

Turning off

Turn the wheel for air flow all the way to the left.

Temperature

Principle

The system heats or cools, depending on the set temperature.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature.

Air conditioning

Principle

The air in the interior will be cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

Functional requirement

The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running.

Turning on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with air conditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.

The cooling mode produces condensation, refer to page 237, that will exit from below the vehicle.

Air recirculation mode

Principle

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the interior air.

Operation

Press the button:

The LED is illuminated when recirculated-air mode is switched on. The supply of outside air is shut off.

When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh air is directed into the vehicle's interior.

To prevent window condensation, recirculated-air mode switches off automatically after a certain amount of time, depending on the outside temperature.

With extended air recirculation mode, the air quality in the interior deteriorates and window fogging increases.

In case of window condensation, switch off air recirculation mode and increase the air flow, if needed.

Air flow, manual

Principle

The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Adjusting

Turn the ring to set the desired air flow.

The higher the air flow, the more effective the heating or cooling power will be.

The air flow from the air conditioning system may be reduced to save vehicle battery power.

Manual air distribution

Principle

The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to select the desired program or the desired intermediate setting.

• Windows.
• Upper body area.
• Footwell.
• Windows, upper body area and foot-well.

To defrost windows and remove condensation

Make the following settings to defrost the windows and remove condensation:

• Direct the air distribution onto the windows.
• Increasing the air flow.
• Increase the temperature.
• Switch on air conditioning if needed.

Heated windshield

Press the button. The LED illuminates.

The heated windshield switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Rear window defroster

Press the button. The LED illuminates.

The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

When GREEN driving mode is activated, the heater output is reduced.

Microfilter

In external and recirculated-air mode, the microfilter filters dust and pollen from the air.

Have this filter changed during vehicle maintenance, refer to page 281.

Automatic climate control

1 Temperature, left
2 Display
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity
4 AUTO program

5 Air distribution, manual
6 Display
7 Temperature, right
8 Seat heating, right 83

9 Maximum cooling
10 Air conditioning
11 Air recirculation mode
12 Rear window defroster

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Turning on

Set any air flow.

Turning off

Turn wheel for air flow to the left until the control panel switches off.

Temperature

Principle

The automatic climate control achieves the set temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary by using the maximum cooling or heater output, and then keeps it constant.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature.

Do not rapidly change between different temperature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.

13 Heated windshield
14 To defrost windows and remove condensation
15 Seat heating, left 83

Air conditioning

Principle

The air in the interior will be cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

Functional requirement

The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running.

Turning on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with air conditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.

Air conditioning is switched on automatically with the AUTO program.

The cooling mode produces condensation, refer to page 237, that will exit from below the vehicle.

Maximum cooling

Principle

The system is set to the lowest temperature, maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode.

Functional requirement

The function is available at outside temperatures above approx. 32 °F/0 °C and with the engine running.

Turning on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the

system switched on.

Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body area. The air vents need to be open for this.

The air flow can be adjusted when maximum cooling is switched on.

AUTO program

Principle

The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats the car's interior automatically.

For this, the air flow, air distribution and temperature are regulated depending on the settings and the interior temperature.

Turning on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the

AUTO program switched on.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the floor area.

Point the side air vents toward the side windows.

The following features are switched on automatically with the AUTO program:

- Air conditioning, refer to page 207.

To switch off the program: press the button again or manually adjust the air distribution.

Adjusting the intensity of the air flow

With the AUTO program switched on, the intensity can be adjusted. This changes the automatic control for the air mass.

Turn the wheel to set the desired intensity from soft to intensive.

The set intensity is displayed via the position of the illuminated LED segment.

Air recirculation mode

Principle

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the interior air.

Operation

Press the button:

The LED is illuminated when recirculated-air mode is switched on. The supply of outside air is shut off.

When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh air is directed into the vehicle's interior.

To prevent window condensation, recirculated-air mode switches off automatically after a certain amount of time, depending on the outside temperature.

With extended air recirculation mode, the air quality in the interior deteriorates and window fogging increases.

In case of window condensation, switch off air recirculation mode and increase the air flow, if needed.

Air flow, manual

Principle

The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually.

General information

To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO program first.

Adjusting

Turn the ring to set the desired air flow.

The manually adjusted air flow is displayed via illuminated LED segments.

The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced to save vehicle battery power.

Manual air distribution

Principle

The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Adjusting

Press the button repeatedly to select a program:

• Windows, upper body area, and footwell.
• Upper body area and footwell.
• Footwell.
• Windows and footwell.
• Windows.
• Windows and upper body area.
• Upper body area.

To defrost windows and remove condensation

Principle

Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side windows.

Turning on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the system switched on.

The air flow can be adjusted with the program active.

If there is window condensation, switch on the air conditioning as well.

Heated windshield

Press the button. The LED illuminates.

The heated windshield switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Rear window defroster

Press the button. The LED illuminates.

The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

When GREEN driving mode is activated, the heater output is reduced.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

In external and recirculated-air mode, the microfilter/activated-charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.

Have this filter changed during vehicle maintenance, refer to page 281.

Ventilation

Setting

The air flow directions can be individually adjusted:

- Direct ventilation:

The air flow is directly pointed onto the person. The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending on the adjusted temperature.

- Indirect ventilation:

If the air vents are fully or partly closed, the air is directly routed into the car's interior.

Front ventilation

• Turn knob for continuous opening and closing of the air vents.
• Swivel the air vents to alter the airflow direction, arrows.

Pre-ventilation

Principle

The pre-ventilation ventilates the interior and lowers its temperature, if needed.

General information

The pre-ventilation can be switched on and off directly or by using two preset activation times. The system remains switched on for 30 minutes.

The pre-ventilation system is operated via the Central Information Display (CID).

Functional requirements

• Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-ready state.
• Direct operation or preset activation time: does not depend on outside temperature.
• The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged.

If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the maximum activation time to save the vehicle battery. The system will be available again after the engine is started or after a short trip.

• Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.
• Open the air vents of the ventilation to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"

The icon on the automatic climate control flashes if the system is switched on.

Preselecting the activation time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Comfort ventilation"
5. Select the desired activation time.
6. Set the desired time.

Activating the activation time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "For start time at:"

Activate the desired activation time.

The icon on the automatic climate control illuminates when the activation time is activated.
The icon on the automatic climate control flashes when the system has been switched on.

The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reactivated.

Interior equipment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Integrated universal remote control

Principle

The integrated Universal Remote Control in the interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled systems such as garage door drives, barriers, or lighting systems.

General information

The Integrated Universal Remote Control replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior mirror must be programmed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security.

If possible, do not install the antenna of the remote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door drive, near metal objects to ensure the best possible operation.

Safety information

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled systems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may result in injury, for example, body parts becoming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the travel path of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information for the hand-held transmitter.

Compatibility

If this icon is printed on the packaging or in the operating instructions of the system to be controlled, the system is generally compatible with the integrated Universal Remote Control.

Additional questions are answered by:

- An authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

- www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.

Overview

1 LED

2 Programmable keys

3 Hand-held transmitters of the system

Programming

General information

The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be fully charged at the time of programming to ensure an optimal range of the integrated universal remote control.

1. Turn on the ignition.

2. Initial commissioning:

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green rapidly. This erases all programming of the buttons on the interior mirror.

1. Press the interior mirror button to be programmed. The LED on the interior mirror will slowly begin flashing orange.

2. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.

3. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter.

Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold

down the interior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.

1. • The LED illuminates green: programming completed.

Release the button.

- The LED flashes fast: programming is not complete.

Press the button on the interior mirror for 2 seconds and release.

Perform this procedure three times to complete the programming procedure.

If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, continue with the special features for change code wireless systems.

- LED does not flash green after 60 seconds: programming not completed.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

To program other functions on other buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

Special feature of the rolling code wireless system

If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features a rolling code radio system.

Refer to the operating instructions for the system.

For systems with a rolling code radio system, the integrated universal remote control and the system also have to be synchronized.

Please read the operating instructions to find out how to synchronize the system.

Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second person.

Synchronizing the universal remote control with the system:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed, e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this step up to three times in order to end synchronization. Once synchronization is complete, the programmed function will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons

1. Turn on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be programmed.
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, release the button.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter. Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.

6. The LED can illuminate in different ways.

- The LED illuminates green: the programming procedure is completed.

Release the button.

- The LED flashes fast: the hand-held transmitter was detected but programming is not complete.

Press the button on the interior mirror for 2 seconds and release. Perform this procedure three times to complete the programming procedure.

If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, continue with the special features for change code wireless systems.

- LED does not flash green after 60 seconds: programming not completed.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

If the programming procedure is not completed, the previous programming will remain unchanged.

Operation

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled systems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may result in injury, for example, body parts becoming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the travel path of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information for the hand-held transmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior mirror LED stays illuminated while the wireless signal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functions

All stored functions will be deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror flashes green fast.

Digital compass

Overview

1 Adjustment knob
2 Mirror display

Mirror display

The compass shows the current driving direction.

Operating concept

Various functions can be called up by pressing the adjustment knob with a pointed object, such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The following adjustment ranges are displayed in succession, depending on how long the adjustment knob is pressed:

• Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
• 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
• 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
• 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand drive setting.
• 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zones

Sets the particular compass zones on the vehicle so that the compass operates correctly; refer to World map with compass zones.

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure

1. Press and hold the adjustment knob for approx. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set compass zone appears in the mirror.

2. To change the zone setting, press the adjustment knob quickly and repeatedly until the number of the compass zone that corresponds with your location appears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. The compass is ready for use again after approximately 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass

The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following:

• The wrong compass point is displayed.
• The point of the compass displayed does not change despite changing the driving direction.
• Not all points of the compass are displayed.

Procedure

1. Make sure that there are no large metallic objects or overhead power lines near the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Press and hold the adjustment knob for approx. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass.

Left/right-hand drive vehicle

The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand drive vehicle at the factory.

Adjusting the language

Press and hold the adjustment knob for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment knob again to switch between English "E" and German "O".

Settings are stored automatically after approximately 10 seconds.

Sun visor

Glare shield

To provide protection against glare, fold the sun visor down or pivot it to the side.

Vanity mirror

A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind a cover.

When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting switches on.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter

Overview

The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in the center console.

Ashtray

In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ashtray from the cup holder.

Cigarette lighter

Safety information

Warning

Contact with the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is held against objects. There is a risk of fire and an injury hazard. There is a risk of damage to property. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle. Make sure that children do not use the cigarette lighter.

Warning

If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Insert the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

Operation

Push in the cigarette lighter. The cigarette lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Sockets

Principle

The socket can be used for electronic devices while the ignition is switched on or the engine is running.

General information

The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.

Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors.

Safety information

Warning

Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags, such as portable navigation devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior during unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.

Warning

Battery chargers that charge the vehicle battery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V electrical system. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the jump-start terminals in the engine compartment.

Warning

If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Insert the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

In the center console

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

In the cargo area

The socket is located on the right side in the cargo area.

USB port

General information

Follow the information regarding the connection of mobile devices to the USB port in the section on USB connections, refer to page 54.

In the center console

Depending on the equipment version, a USB port Type A or a USB port Type A and a USB port Type C are located in the front of the center console.

Properties of upper USB port:

• USB port Type A.
• For charging mobile devices and for data transfer.
• Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
  Properties of lower USB port:
• USB port Type C.
• For charging of mobile devices.
• Charge current: max. 3 A.

Wireless charging tray

Principle

The wireless charging tray enables the following functions to be performed without cables:

- Charging the rechargeable battery of a mobile phone with Qi capability and of other mobile devices, which support the Qi standard.

- Connect the mobile phone to the external antenna.

Depending on the country, this provides for better network reception and a consistent reproduction quality.

General information

When inserting the mobile phone, make sure there are no objects between it and the wireless charging tray.

During charging, the surface of the tray and the mobile phone may heat up. Higher temperatures may lead to a reduction in the charge current through the mobile phone, and in isolated cases the charging process is paused temporarily. Follow the relevant instructions in the mobile phone owner's manual.

NOTE

This device has been tested for human exposure limits and found compliant at a minimum distance of 4 in/10 cm during operation.

Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be maintained in every direction when operating the device.

Mounting position of the product.

Safety information

Warning

When charging a Qi-compatible device in the wireless charging tray, any metal objects on the tray together with the device can become very hot. If storage media or electronic cards, e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips, or cards that transmit signals, are placed on the tray together

with the device, they may not function correctly. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. When charging mobile devices, make sure there are no objects on the tray together with the device.

NOTICE

The tray is intended for mobile phones up to a particular size. Forceful inserting of the mobile phone into the tray can damage the tray or the mobile phone. There is a risk of damage to property. Observe the maximum dimensions for mobile phones. Do not force the mobile phone into the tray.

Functional requirements

• Ignition or standby state is switched on.
• The mobile phone must compatibly support the required Qi standard. Compatible mobile phones, refer to page 52. If the mobile phone does not support the Qi standard, the mobile phone can be charged using a special Qi-compatible charging case.
• Use only protective sleeves and covers up to a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm. Otherwise, the charging function may be impaired.
• The mobile phone must not exceed the maximum size of approximately 5.9 x 3.07 x 0.62 in/150 x 78 x 16 mm.

Overview

The wireless charging tray is located in the center armrest.

1 Front holder with LED
2 Storage area
3 Movable retaining clip

Inserting the mobile phone

1. Open the center armrest.
2. Push back the retaining clip.
3. Insert the mobile phone with the display facing upward in the direction of the front holder, arrow 1.

1. Place the mobile phone in the storage area, arrow 2.
2. Push the retaining clip forward and clip the mobile phone in the tray.
3. Close the center armrest.

Removing the mobile phone

1. Open the center armrest.
2. Push the retaining clip back and remove the mobile phone.

LED displays

Color Meaning

Blue The mobile phone is charging. Depending on the model, the blue LED is no longer illuminated once the inserted mobile phone with Qi capability is fully charged.
Orange	The mobile phone is not charging.Temperature on the mobile phone possibly too high or foreign object in the charging tray.
Red The mobile phone is not charging.Contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

System limits

At high temperatures on the mobile phone or in the vehicle, the charging functions of the mobile phone may be limited and some functions may no longer work.

LTE-Compensator - Information and User Manual

Your car is equipped with a wireless charging tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone and connect it to the mobile network. To ensure the best possible connection a signal booster (LTE-Compensator) is used in conjunction with the WCA. The following paragraphs refer to this booster:

This is a CONSUMER device.

BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DEVICE with your wireless provider and have your provider's consent. Most wireless providers consent to the use of Compensators. Some providers may not consent to the use of this device on their network. If

you are unsure, contact your provider. You MUST operate this device with approved antennas and cables as specified by the manufacturer. Antennas MUST be installed at least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You MUST cease operating this device immediately if requested by the FCC or a licensed wireless service provider. Warning E911 location information may not be provided or may be inaccurate for calls served by using this device.

Please observe additionally the following information

• Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to register their signal boosters by calling their toll-free number.
• T-Mobile online registration link: (www.T-Mobile.com/Booster-Registration); (https://saqat.t-mobile.com/sites/SignalBooster#).
• Verizon's online registration link: (http://www.verizonwireless.com/wcms/consumer/register-signal-booster.html).
• AT&T online registration link (https://securec45.securewebsession.com/attsignalbooster.com/).
• U.S.Cellular online registration link (http://www.uscellular.com/uscellular/support/fcc-booster-registration.jsp).

Before use you must register your booster device with your wireless provider.

If you should be requested by the FCC to cease operating your booster, you are not allowed to insert your mobile phone in the charging tray anymore unless the booster is permanently deactivated by your local MINI dealer.

You must not remove the booster from the car nor use it with any other than the pre-installed coupling device or antenna. Any modification of the existing antenna or coupling device as well as the use of other an-

tennas or coupling devices will cause the cease of the booster's operating license.

The booster device fulfills the network protection standards as required by the FCC, such as intermodulation limits, oscillation detection and gain limits.

Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive

Model Number: LTECOMPB0

Part Number: 6803145-01

FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPBO

Storage compartments

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Safety information

Warning

Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable, such as mobile phones or loose objects, can be thrown through the vehicle interior while driving, such as in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices that are connected to the vehicle via a cable.

Warning

Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can damage the dashboard. Attached objects may come loose. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not use anti-slip pads.

Overview

The following storage compartments are available in the interior:

• Glove compartment on the front passenger side.
• Compartments in the doors.
• Storage compartment in the center arm-rest.
• Storage compartment in front of the cup holders.
• Coat hooks
• Storage tray in the center console.
• Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.

Glove compartment

Safety information

Warning

Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the glove compartment can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the glove compartment immediately after using it.

Opening

Pull the handle.

Closing

Fold up the lid.

Storage compartments in the doors

General information

There are storage compartments in the doors.

Safety information

Warning

Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or glasses, can break in the event of an accident, braking or an evasive maneuver. Broken glass can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not use any breakable objects while driving. Only stow breakable objects in closed storage compartments.

Center armrest

General information

The center armrest contains a storage compartment.

Opening

Press button, arrow 1, and open center armrest upward, arrow 2.

Adjusting the height

Press button, arrow 1, and swing center armrest upward or downward into the desired height, arrow 2.

Cup holders

Safety information

Warning

Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may damage the cup holders or be thrown about the car's interior in the event of an accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled liquids can distract from the surrounding traffic conditions and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not force objects into the cup holder. Use lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not transport hot beverages.

Front

In the center console.

Back

For 3-door models: in front of the rear seats and in the side armrests.

For 5-door models: in front of the rear seats.

Coat hooks

General information

3-door model: The coat hooks are located above the side windows in the rear.

5-door model: The coat hooks are located above the rear doors.

Safety information

Warning

Clothing articles on the coat hooks can obstruct the view while driving. There is a risk of accident. When suspending clothing articles from the coat hooks, ensure

that they will not obstruct the driver's view.

Warning

Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang lightweight objects, for instance clothing articles, from the coat hooks.

Cargo area

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Loading

Safety information

Warning

High gross vehicle weight can overheat the tires, damage them internally and cause a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving characteristics may be negatively impacted, reducing directional stability, lengthening the braking distances and changing the steering response. There is a risk of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load-carrying capacity of the tires and never exceed the permitted gross vehicle weight.

Warning

Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable, such as mobile phones or loose objects, can be thrown through the vehicle interior while driving, such as in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose

objects or devices that are connected to the vehicle via a cable.

Warning

Improperly stowed objects can slip and be thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or an evasive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects and cargo properly.

NOTICE

Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.

Steps for determining correct load limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in the vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in the vehicle, the amount of available cargo and

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)

1. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
2. If the vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to the vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of the vehicle.

Payload

On 3-door models

On 5-door models

The maximum payload is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing and securing cargo

• Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
• Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear seat backrests.
• Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer seat belts in the opposite buckle.
• Fold down the rear seat backrests completely to stow large cargo.
• Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of the backrests.
• Small and light cargo: secure with luggage straps or draw straps.
• Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo straps.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

Without storage compartment package: to secure the cargo there are two lashing eyes, arrows 1, in the cargo area.

With storage compartment package: to secure the cargo there are six lashing eyes, arrows 1 and 2, in the cargo area.

Attach auxiliary materials to secure the cargo, such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Cargo cover

General information

When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is raised.

Safety information

Warning

Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable, such as mobile phones or loose objects, can be thrown through the vehicle interior while driving, such as in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices that are connected to the vehicle via a cable.

Removing

For storing bulky objects the cargo cover can be removed.

1. Detach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.
2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets on the left and right.

Installing

1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizontally into the two side brackets until it audibly engages.
2. Hook the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.

Storage space under cargo floor panel

Located under the cargo floor panel on the right side is a recess for the onboard vehicle tool kit.

Fold the right side of the cargo floor panel upward to remove the onboard vehicle tool kit.

Enlarging the cargo area

Principle

The cargo area can be enlarged as follows:

• The rear seat backrests can be folded down.
• The rear seat backrests can be moved into an upright loading position using the cargo setting.

General information

The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. The left rear seat backrest is connected to the center section. The rear seat backrests can be folded down with the respective loops from the rear.

Safety information

Warning

There is a danger of jamming with folding down the rear seat backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the rear seat backrest and the of the head restraint is clear prior to folding down.

Warning

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured cargo can be thrown about the car's interior; for instance, in the event of an accident, braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after folding it back.

Warning

With a rear seat backrest that is not locked, the protective effect of the middle seat belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. If you are using the middle seat belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat setting or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injury or

danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Folding down the rear seat backrest from the rear

1. Before the rear seat backrest is folded down, hook the corresponding seat belt into the belt retainer on the side.
2. Pull the lever up, arrow 1, and fold the rear seat backrest forward, arrow 2.

Cargo position

Principle

The rear seat backrests can be moved into an upright loading position.

Adjusting

1. Release the backrest, and tilt it forward.
2. Fold the frame up until it engages.

1. Fold back and engage the rear seat backrest.

Folding back the backrest

Fold up the backrest and press it into the latch. Make sure that the seat belt is not caught behind the backrest or in between the backrest and the rear seats.

Variable cargo area floor

Principle

With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo area can be configured corresponding to transport requirements.

General information

Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer to page 227.

Removing the cargo floor panel

On 5-door models: To change the position of the cargo floor panel, first fold up the rear part of the cargo floor panel.

Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and fold slightly upward. Next, pull it backward from the supports.

The cargo floor panel can be removed from the cargo area above the tail lights.

Lower position

• Larger objects can be transported.
• Space for smaller objects remains between the fixed and variable cargo area floor.

Folded up position

Safety information

Warning

Improper use of the cargo area floor can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers, for example. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property.

• Do not use the cargo area floor to separate the cargo area and vehicle interior in the sense of a luggage net.
• Only use the cargo area floor in the folded-up position when the rear seat backrests are folded up and locked.
• Fold down the cargo area floor before driving off.
• Always secure cargo against slipping, using straps, belts and lashing eyes, for instance.

Fold up the cargo floor panel

Fold up the cargo floor panel in the lower position and push it behind the locks, arrow. You've reached the maximum cargo height.

Upper position

• With the backrests folded down, a long, flat loading platform is produced.
• For 3-door models: Maximum payload in this position: 330 lbs/150 kg.
• For 5-door models: Maximum payload in this position: 441 lbs/200 kg.
• Space for objects remains between the fixed and variable cargo area floor.

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Break-in procedures

General information

Moving parts need to work together smoothly.

The following instructions will help you to achieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.

During break-in, do not use the Launch Control, refer to page 120.

Safety information

Warning

Due to new parts and components, safety and driver assistance systems can react with a delay. There is a risk of accident. After installing new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conservatively and intervene early if necessary. Observe the break-in procedures of the respective parts and components.

Engine, transmission, and axle drive

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed:

- For gasoline engine4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h.

Avoid full throttle or kickdown under all circumstances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km

The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing circumstances when tires are brand new.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system

Brake disks and brake pads must be run in to avoid possible brake noise. Drive cautiously for the first approx. 300 miles/500 km.

Clutch

The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement

The same break-in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of driving.

General driving notes

Closing the tailgate

Safety information

Warning

An open tailgate protrudes from the vehicle and can endanger occupants and other road users or damage the vehicle in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open.

Driving with the tailgate open

If the vehicle still needs to be driven with the tailgate open:

• Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
• Greatly increase the blower output.
• Drive moderately.

Ice on window glass

NOTICE

The window will be lowered slightly when pulling on the door handle. In the event of frost, the window may be frozen solid and may not be able to be lowered. There is a risk of damage to property. When pulling on the door handle, make sure that the window is lowered. If necessary, remove snow and ice from the window. Do not open the door with force.

Hot exhaust system

Warning

High temperatures can occur underneath the body, for instance caused by the exhaust system, while driving. Contact with the exhaust system can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the hot exhaust system, including the exhaust pipe.

Warning

If combustible materials, such as leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, these materials can ignite. There is a risk of fire and an injury hazard. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no combustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts while driving, in Neutral or during parking.

Mobile radio in the vehicle

Warning

Vehicle electronics and mobile communication devices can influence one another. There is radiation due to the transmission operations of mobile communication devices. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. If possible, in the car's interior only use mobile communication devices, such as mobile phones, with a direct connection to an external antenna or the Personal eSIM in order to prevent mutual interference and to deflect radiation from the vehicle interior.

Aquaplaning

On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface.

This phenomenon is referred to as aqua-planing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.

Driving through water

General information

When driving through water, follow the following:

- Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function.

- Drive through calm water only.

- Drive through water only if it is not deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.

- Drive through water at a maximum of walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.

Safety information

NOTICE

When driving too quickly through deep water, the water can penetrate the engine compartment, the electrical system, or the transmission. There is a risk of damage to property. When driving through water, do not exceed the maximum indicated water level and the maximum speed for driving through water.

Braking safely

General information

The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Braking System as a standard feature.

Perform emergency braking in situations that require such. To achieve the best possible brake boosting, do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during full braking.

Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering movement.

The pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that the Antilock Braking System is in its active mode.

Objects in the travel path of the pedals

Warning

Objects in the driver's footwell can limit the pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's footwell. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning.

Driving in wet conditions

In case of wet roads, exposure to road salt or in heavy rain, gently depress the brake pedal every few kilometers.

Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users.

The heat generated during braking dries brake disks and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

In this way the brake force will be available when you need it.

Hills

General information

Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the brake system may overheat and reduce braking effect.

You can increase the engine's braking effect by downshifting, going all the way to first gear, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

Light but consistent pressure on the brake pedal can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake system failure. There is a risk of accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system.

Warning

In idle state or with the drive-ready state switched off, safety functions, for instance engine braking effect, braking assistance and steering assistance, may not be available. There is a risk of accident. Do not attempt to drive in idle state or with drive-ready state switched off.

Brake disk corrosion

Corrosion on the brake disks and contamination on the brake pads are increased by the following circumstances:

• Low mileage.
• Extended stationary periods.
• Infrequent use of the brakes.
• Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning agents.

Corrosion buildup on the brake disks will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes when braking slowly - generally this cannot be corrected.

Condensation water under the parked vehicle

When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops and collects underneath the vehicle.

Ground clearance

NOTICE

If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g., curbs or underground garage entrances, contact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler, and the underbody may occur. There is a risk of damage to property. Ensure that there is sufficient ground clearance available.

Roof-mounted luggage rack

General information

Installation only possible with roof rack.

Roof racks are available as optional accessories.

Installation

Follow the assembly instructions of the roof rack.

Loading

Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response.

Therefore, note the following when loading and driving:

• Do not exceed the approved roof/axle weights and the approved gross vehicle weight.
• Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
• Distribute the roof load uniformly.
• The roof load should not extend past the loading area.
• Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom.
• Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance using luggage straps.
• Do not let objects project into the swiveling range of the tailgate.
• Drive cautiously and avoid driving off and braking with jerky movements or fast cornering.

Driving on racetracks

Warning

The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport or motorsport-like competition. There is a risk of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M Sport or motorsport-like competitions.

Higher mechanical and thermal loads during racetrack operation lead to increased wear. Use of the vehicle in M Sport or motor sport type competition is an improper use of the vehicle and may affect your warranty coverage. Please consult the “New Vehicle Limited Warranty” Booklet for further information on warranty matters.

Reducing fuel consumption

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The vehicle contains advanced technologies for the reduction of consumption and emission values.

Fuel consumption depends on a number of different factors.

The implementation of certain measures, driving style and regular maintenance can influence fuel consumption and environmental pollution.

Removing unnecessary cargo

Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Removing attached parts following use

Remove roof-mounted or rear carriers which are no longer required following use. Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerodynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Close the windows and glass sunroof

Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased drag and raises fuel consumption.

Tires

General information

Tires can affect consumption in various ways, for instance tire size may influence consumption.

Checking the tire pressure regularly

Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip.

Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling resistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.

Drive away without delay

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate RPM.

This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

Anticipatory driving

A smooth and anticipatory driving style reduces fuel consumption.

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.

Maintain a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you.

Avoid high RPM

Driving at low RPM lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.

If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indicator, refer to page 133.

Using coasting/overrun mode

When approaching a red traffic light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.

For going downhill take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle roll.

The fuel supply is interrupted in coasting/overrun mode.

Switch off the engine during longer stops

Switching off the engine

Switch off the engine during longer stops, for instance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic jam.

Auto Start/Stop function

The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle automatically switches off the engine during a stop.

If the engine is switched off and then re-started rather than leaving the engine running constantly, fuel consumption and emissions are reduced. Savings can begin within a few seconds of an engine stop.

In addition, fuel consumption is also determined by other factors, such as driving style, road conditions, maintenance or environmental factors.

Switching off any functions that are not currently needed

Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel, especially in city traffic and with stop-and-go driving. Switch off these functions if they are not needed.

Having maintenance carried out

Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. MINI recommends that maintenance work be performed by an authorized service center.

Additional information:

MINI maintenance system, refer to page 281.

GREEN Mode

Principle

GREEN Mode supports a driving style that saves on consumption. For this purpose, the engine control and comfort features, for

instance the climate control output, are adjusted.

For Steptronic transmission:

When certain prerequisites are met the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmission in the D selector lever position. The vehicle continues traveling in Neutral to reduce consumption. The D selector lever position remains engaged.

In addition, context-sensitive instructions are displayed to assist with an efficient driving style.

The achieved extended range is displayed in the instrument cluster as bonus range.

General information

The system includes the following MINIMALISM functions and MINIMALISM displays:

• GREEN Limit, refer to page 241
• GREEN climate control, refer to page 241.
• GREEN bonus range, refer to page 242.
• GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to page 242.
• Coasting mode, refer to page 243.
• MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to page 245.

Activating GREEN Mode

Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch

1. Activating GREEN Mode.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Select the desired setting.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

1. My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Configure GREEN"
4. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating the functions

The following functions can be activated/deactivated:

• "GREEN speed warning"
• "GREEN climate control"
• "Coasting"

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

GREEN Limit

• "GREEN speed warning": GREEN Limit is activated.
  A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of the set GREEN Limit is exceeded.
• "Tip at:"
  Set the desired speed for the GREEN Limit.

GREEN climate control

Climate control is set to be efficient.

A minor deviation to the set temperature and adjusting the rate of heating or cooling down of the car's interior consumption can be economized.

The power output to the seat heating and exterior mirror heating is reduced.

Coasting

Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging the engine and coasting, refer to page 243, in Neutral.

This function is only available in GREEN driving mode.

Deactivate the function to use the braking effect of the engine when traveling downhill.

GREEN potential savings

Shows potential savings with the current configuration in percentages.

Display in the instrument cluster

GREEN bonus range

A modified driving style helps you extend your driving range.

The range extension can be displayed as the bonus range in the instrument cluster.

The bonus range is shown in the range display.

The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled.

- Green display: efficient driving style.

- Gray display: modify driving style, for instance by backing off the accelerator pedal.

Efficiency display

A bar display in the instrument cluster indicates your current driving efficiency. Mark in the left area, arrow 1: display for energy recovered

by coasting or when braking.

Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display when accelerating.

The efficiency of your driving style is shown by the position of the mark:

- Mark inside the green range: efficient driving style.

- Mark outside the green range: modify driving style, for example by backing off the accelerator.

GREEN tip, driving instruction

General information

The GREEN tip indicates that your driving style can be modified to be more efficient, for example by reducing the speed.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: display

Activating/deactivating the display

Activate information relating to the driving style and GREEN tips in the instrument

cluster using the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "GREEN info"

GREEN tip, icons

An additional icon and text instructions are displayed.

Icon Measure

	For an efficient driving style, look well ahead when driving, accelerate conservatively, and delay accelerating.
	Reduce speed to the selected GREEN speed.
	Steptronic transmission:Switch from M/S to D and avoid manual shift interventions.
	Manual transmission:Follow the shift instructions.
	Manual transmission:Engage Neutral for an engine stop.

Indications on the control display

Displaying MINIMALISM information

The current operating principle of the functions in GREEN driving mode can be displayed on the control display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM"

Information is shown on the following functions:

• Auto Start/Stop function.
• Energy recovery.
• Coasting.

Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"

Further information on the MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to page 245.

Coasting

Principle

The function helps to conserve fuel.

To do this, under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmission when selector lever position D is set. The vehicle continues traveling in Neutral to reduce consumption. Selector lever position D remains engaged.

This driving condition is referred to as coasting.

As soon as you step on the brake or accelerator pedal, the engine is automatically coupled again.

General information

A proactive driving style helps the driver to use the function often and supports the efficient effect of coasting.

Functional requirements

The function is available in the speed range from approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to 100 mph/160 km/h.

• Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not operated.
• The selector lever is in selector lever position D.
• Engine and transmission are at operating temperature.
• With a camera in the area of the interior mirror: the system does not detect any vehicles ahead of you.

Operation via shift paddles

Principle

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the Coasting mode can be influenced with the shift paddles.

Activating/deactivating coasting via shift paddles

1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right shift paddle.
2. To activate Coasting mode, actuate the right shift paddle again.

To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.

Display

Instrument cluster without enhanced features

The bar display below the tachometer is filled in green and the mark appears at the zero point. The tachometer indicates idle speed.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features

The bar display below the tachometer is filled in green and the mark appears at the zero point. The tachometer indicates idle speed.

Indications on the control display

The Coasting mode is displayed in the MINIMALISM Info while driving.

The distance traveled in Coasting mode is indicated by a counter.

Displaying MINIMALISM information

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM"

System limits

The function is not available if one of the following conditions applies:

• DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated.
• Cruise control is activated.
• If driving in the dynamic limit range.
• If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades.
• The battery charge state is temporarily too low.
• The vehicle electrical system is drawing excessive current.

MINIMALISM analyzer

Principle

The function helps develop an especially efficient driving style and to conserve fuel.

For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the control display.

This display will help you adjust your driving style and save some fuel.

The range of the vehicle can be extended by adopting an efficient driving style. This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the instrument cluster and on the control display.

Functional requirement

This function is available in GREEN driving mode.

Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"

Display on the control display

The display of the MINIMALISM analyzer consists of a fish in a water glass, a table of values and the display of the achieved bonus range.

The fish and the movements of the water in the bowl symbolize the efficiency of the driving style.

Depending on the equipment, the fish is shown with efficient and inefficient driving style or only with inefficient driving style.

The more efficient the driving style, the less the water sloshes around in the bowl and the better is the fish's mood. If the driving style is inefficient, the water oscillates, the

fish's mood worsens, and a reduced number of stars is displayed.

The table of values contains stars and evaluates the driving style in different categories. The more efficient the driving style, the more stars are displayed in the table.

The bonus range achieved by a driving style that minimizes consumption is displayed below the table of values. The more efficient the driving style, the faster the bonus range increases.

To support an efficient driving style, GREEN tips are displayed while driving.

Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Saving fuel, refer to page 239.

Refueling

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to page 248, prior to refueling.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel promptly.

Fuel cap

Opening

1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge and open it.

1. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

1. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

Closing

Warning

The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jammed and crushed during closing. The cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Pay attention that the retaining strap is not jammed or crushed when closing the cap.

1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.

Emergency unlocking

It may be necessary in certain situations to unlock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance with an electrical malfunction.

Have the fuel filler flap unlocked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Follow the following when re-fueling

General information

When refueling, hook the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the filler nozzle during refueling causes:

• Premature switching off.
• Reduced return of the fuel vapors.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly after refueling, otherwise the emissions warning light may illuminate.

Follow safety regulations posted at the filling station.

Safety information

NOTICE

Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.

Fuel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Fuel recommendation

General information

Depending on the region, many filling stations sell fuel that has been customized to winter or summer conditions. Fuel that is available in winter, for instance helps make a cold start easier.

Gasoline

General information

For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.

Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as containing metal must not be used.

You can fill up using fuel with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %; e.g., E10.

To achieve nominal values for mileage and consumption, follow the specified fuel quality in the sales literature.

The use of fuels of minimum quality has no influence on the service life of the engine.

Safety information

NOTICE

Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel system and engine. Furthermore, the catalytic converter is permanently damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or add the following in the case of gasoline engines:

• Leaded gasoline.
• Metallic additives, for instance manganese or iron.

Do not press the Start/Stop button after refueling with the wrong fuel. Contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

NOTICE

Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and the engine. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use fuels with a higher ethanol content than recommended. Do not refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to M100.

NOTICE

Fuel that does not comply with the minimum quality can compromise engine function or cause engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not fill with fuel that does not comply with the minimum quality.

Caution

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Additionally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur.

If drivability problems are encountered, we recommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI number — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.

Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for additional maintenance.

Recommended gas quality

MINI recommends AKI 91.

John Cooper Works:

MINI recommends AKI 93.

Minimum fuel grade

MINI recommends AKI 87.

John Cooper Works:

MINI recommends AKI 91.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high external temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Tire pressure

General information

The tire condition and tire pressure influence the following:

• The service life of the tires.
• Driving safety.
• Driving comfort.
• Fuel consumption.

Safety information

Warning

A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure may heat up significantly and sustain damage. This will have a negative impact on aspects of handling, such as steering and braking response. There is a risk of accident. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it as needed, for instance twice a month and before a long trip.

Tire pressure specifications

In the tire inflation pressure table

The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 251, contains all tire inflation pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.

To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following:

• Tire sizes of the vehicle.
• Maximum speed for driving.

Checking the tire pressure

General information

Tires heat up while driving. The tire pressure increases with the tire temperature.

Tires have a natural, consistent tire pressure loss.

The displays of inflation devices may under-read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.

Checking using tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table

The tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold tires or tires at the same temperature as the ambient temperature.

Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when the tires are cold, i.e.:

• Distance travelled of max.
  1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded.

• If the vehicle has not moved again for at least 2 hours after a trip.

• Determine the intended tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted tires.

• Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
• Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual tire inflation pressure deviates from the intended tire inflation pressure.
• Check whether all valve caps are screwed onto the tire valves.

After correcting the tire pressure

For flat tire monitor: reinitialize flat tire monitor.

For Tire Pressure Monitor: reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Checking the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel

Located behind the bumper on the underside of the vehicle is an opening for checking the tire inflation pressure.

Tire pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/h

For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire pressure table, refer to page 251, and adjust as necessary.

These pressure values can also be found on the tire pressure label on the driver's door pillar.

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

Tire pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

On 3-door models: COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

195/55 R 16 87

V A/S

195/55 R 16 87

W

195/55 R 16 87

H M+S

2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

175/65 R 15 84H A/S	2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32
205/45 R 17 88V XL A/S
205/45 R 17 88W XL
175/65 R 15 88H XL M+S
205/45 R 17 88V XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86W XL	2.6 / 38 2.2 / 32
175/60 R 16 86H XL M+S
185/50 R 17 86H XL M+S

On 3-door models: COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
195/55 R 16 87 V A/S	2.3 / 33 2.2 / 32
195/55 R 16 87 W
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

205/45 R 17 88V XL A/S	2.5 / 36 2.2 / 32
205/45 R 17 88W XL
205/45 R 17 88V XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86W XL	2.7 / 39 2.3 / 33
185/50 R 17 86H XL M+S

On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER WORKS

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S	2.6 / 38 2.2 / 32
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
205/45 R 17 88 Y XL
205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86 W XL	2.8 / 41 2.4 / 35
185/50 R 17 86 H XL M+S

On 5-door models: COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
195/55 R 16 87 V A/S	2.3 / 33 2.2 / 32
195/55 R 16 87 W
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S
175/65 R 15 84 H A/S	2.6 / 38 2.3 / 33
205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
175/65 R 15 88 H XL M+S
205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86 W XL	2.7 / 39 2.5 / 36
175/60 R 16 86 H XL M+S
185/50 R 17 86 H XL M+S

On 5-door models: COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
195/55 R 16 87 V A/S	2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32
195/55 R 16 87 W
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S
205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S	2.6 / 38 2.3 / 33
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86 W XL	2.8 / 41 2.5 / 36
185/50 R 17 86 H XL M+S

Tire inflation pressures at maximum speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

Warning

In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur.

For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pres-

sure values in the tire pressure table, refer to page 254, and adjust as necessary.

Tire pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h

On 3-door models: COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
195/55 R 16 87 V A/S	2.5 / 36 2.2 / 32
195/55 R 16 87 W
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S
175/65 R 15 84 H A/S	2.7 / 39 2.3 / 33
205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
175/65 R 15 88 H XL M+S
205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86 W XL	2.9 / 42 2.4 / 35
175/60 R 16 86 H XL M+S
185/50 R 17 86 H XL M+S

On 3-door models: COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
195/55 R 16 87 V A/S	2.8 / 41 2.3 / 33
195/55 R 16 87 W
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S
205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S	3.1 / 45 2.6 / 38
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86 W XL	3.2 / 46 2.7 / 39
185/50 R 17 86 H XL M+S

On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER WORKS

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S	3.2 / 46 2.7 / 39
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
205/45 R 17 88 Y XL
205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86 W XL	3.3 / 48 2.8 / 41
185/50 R 17 86 H XL M+S

On 5-door models: COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
195/55 R 16 87 V A/S	2.6 / 38 2.3 / 33
195/55 R 16 87 W
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S

On 5-door models: COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
195/55 R 16 87 V A/S	3.0 / 44 2.6 / 38
195/55 R 16 87 W
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S
205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S	3.3 / 48 2.9 / 42
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86 W XL
185/50 R 17 86 H XL M+S

Tire marking

Tire size

205/45 R 17 84 V

205: nominal width in mm

45: cross-sectional relationship in %

R: radial tire code

17: rim diameter in inches

84: load bearing capacity

V: speed code letter

ZR tires: reinforced radial tire for speeds exceeding 150 mph/240 km/h

Maximum tire load

Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on the certification label on the driver's door pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the vehicle's Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively.

Speed letter

Designation	Maximum speed
Q up to 100	mph/160 km/h
R up to 106	mph/170 km/h
S up to 112	mph/180 km/h
T up to 118	mph/190 km/h
H up to 131	mph/210 km/h
V up to 150	mph/240 km/h
W up to 167	mph/270 km/h
Y up to 186	mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number

DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0123

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design

0123: tire age

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

Recommendation

Regardless of the tire tread depth, replace tires at least every 6 years.

Manufacture date

You can find the manufacture date of the tire on the tire sidewall.

Designation Manufacture date

DOT ... 0123 1st week of 2023

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Treadwear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under

controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Runflat tires

Runflat tires, refer to page 261, are labeled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

M+S

Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.

Tire tread

Summer tires

Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased risk of aquaplaning.

Winter tires

Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for winter driving conditions.

All-season tires

Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for winter driving conditions.

Minimum tread depth

Distributed over the tire circumference are the tire manufacturer's wear indicators with a height of at least 0.06 in/1.6 mm, which serve as an indicator of tire tread wear.

The positions of the wear indicators are marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Irrespective of the wear indicators, observe the statutory regulations on the minimum tread depth.

Tire damage

General information

Check your tires regularly for damage, foreign bodies lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if the vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires.

Indications of tire damage or other vehicle malfunctions:

• Unusual vibrations.
• Unusual tire or running noises.
• Unusual handling such as a strong tendency to pull to the left or right.
• Uneven wear pattern, e.g., increased wear in the area of the tire shoulder.

Damage can be caused by the following situations, for instance:

• Driving over curbs.
• Road damage.
• Tire pressure too low.
• Vehicle overloading.
• Incorrect tire storage.

Safety information

Warning

Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There is a risk of accident. If tire damage is suspected while driving, immediately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. To do so, drive carefully to an authorized service center

or another qualified service center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires, but have them replaced.

Warning

Tires can become damaged by driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the higher the risk of tire damage. There may be a risk of accidents and risk of damage to property. If possible, avoid driving over objects or road conditions that may damage tires, or drive over them slowly and carefully.

Exchanging wheels and tires

Mounting and wheel balancing

Have wheels and tires mounted and balanced by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Approved wheels and tires

General information

Only certain wheel/tire combinations are suitable depending on vehicle and equipment. The vehicle manufacturer determines wheel/tire combinations on the basis of the following criteria:

• Tire size, e.g., tire width, aspect ratio.
• Wheel size, e.g., rim diameter, offset.

Ask an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop about wheels and tires that are suitable for the vehicle as well as special equipment.

Safety information

Warning

Wheels and tires that are not suitable for the vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you use only wheels and tires that have been approved as suitable for the vehicle type.

Warning

Unsuitable wheel/tire combinations will impair vehicle handling and a number of system functions, such as the Antilock Braking System or Dynamic Stability Control. There is a risk of accident. The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you use only wheels and tires that have been approved as suitable for the vehicle type. Following tire damage, have the original wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Recommended tire brands

Tire types are developed for each vehicle and optimized specifically for the individual requirements of that vehicle, e.g.:

• Handling.
• Comfort.
• Noise characteristics.

Specially developed tires are marked with a star on the tire sidewall. After replacing

wheels and tires, the vehicle manufacturer recommends using star-marked tires again. The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you use tires of the same make and tread design.

New tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing circumstances when tires are brand new.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tires

Warning

Retreated tires can have different tire casing structures. With advanced age the service life can be limited. There is a risk of accident. The manufacturer of the vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires.

Winter tires

Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads.

Winter tires can be identified by the icon with mountain and snowflake, as well as the M+S marking on the tire sidewall.

All-season tires with the M+S designation, but without icon with mountain and snow-flake, have better winter characteristics than summer tires but generally do not achieve the performance of winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then attach a sign showing the permissible maximum speed in the field of vision. The info label is available from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

With winter tires mounted, observe and do not exceed the permissible maximum speed.

Changing runflat tires

When changing from runflat tires to standard tires, it must be ensured that the vehicle contains an emergency wheel or tire mobility kit. For more information, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Wheel change between axles

Different abrasion patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs between the axles to achieve even abrasion. For more information, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. After changing, check the tire pressure and correct, if needed.

Storing tires

Tire pressure

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

Storage

Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark place.

Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease, and solvents.

Do not leave tires in plastic bags.

Remove dirt from wheels or tires.

Runflat tires

Principle

Runflat tires permit continued driving under limited conditions even in the event of a complete tire pressure loss.

General information

The wheels are composed of tires that are self-supporting to a limited degree.

The reinforcement of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a limited degree in the event of a tire pressure loss.

Follow the instructions for continued driving with a flat tire.

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a runflat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced directional stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Identification

Runflat tires are labeled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Repairing a flat tire

Safety precautions

• Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground.
• Turn on the hazard warning system.
• Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.
• Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock.
• Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the hazardous area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.
• If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Tire repair set

Principle

With the tire repair set, minor tire damage can be sealed temporarily to enable continued driving.

General information

• The filled in tire sealant closes the damage from the inside when it hardens.
• Follow the instructions on using the tire repair set found on the compressor and sealant bottle.
• The use of a tire repair set can be ineffective if the tire puncture measures above approx. 0.16 in/4 mm.
• Do not remove foreign objects that have penetrated the tire. Remove foreign objects only when they are visibly protruding from the tire.
• The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure.

Overview

Storage

Depending on the equipment, storage for the tire repair set is provided as follows:

• In the cargo area under the cargo floor panel.
• In the cargo area on the left or right side.
• In the cargo area behind a side trim panel.

Sealant bottle and filler hose

1 Sealant bottle
2 Sealant bottle outlet
3 Filler hose

4 Sealant bottle connection
5 Wheel valve connection

Compressor

1 Compressor
2 Tire pressure display
3 Pressure reducing valve button
4 Sealant bottle mount
5 Connector for socket
6 On/off switch

Safety precautions

• Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground.
• Turn on the hazard warning system.
• Set the parking brake.
• Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock.
• As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out and make sure that they remain outside the hazardous area such as behind a guard-rail.
• If necessary, set up the hazard triangle or hazard warning lights at an appropriate distance.
• Remove the warning label for the maximum permissible speed from the com-

pressor and attach it in the visible area in the vehicle interior.

- Remove the warning label from the tire sealant bottle and attach it to the rim.

Preparing the tire repair set

1. Insert the sealant bottle into the mount on the housing of the compressor.

1. Turn the sealant bottle clockwise by 90° to the stop.

1. Connect the filler hose to the outlet of the sealant bottle and turn clockwise by 90° to the stop.

1. Unscrew the valve cap from the wheel and screw the connecting piece of the filler hose onto the valve.

1. With the compressor switched off, insert the connector into the power socket in the vehicle interior.

Filling the tire with sealing compound

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are colorless and odorless. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

NOTICE

The compressor can overheat during extended operation. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes.

Filling the tire with sealing compound

1. With standby state or drive-ready state switched on, switch on the compressor.

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill in the tire sealant and reach a tire pressure of 2.5 bar/36 psi.

While the tire is being filled with tire sealant, the tire pressure can briefly reach approx. 6 bar/87 psi. Do not turn off the compressor in this phase.

1. Switch off the compressor.

Checking the tire pressure

Read the tire pressure on the tire pressure display of the compressor. The tire pressure must be at least 2.5 bar/36 psi.

Tire pressure too high

If the tire pressure is too high, reduce the tire pressure with the pressure reducing valve on the compressor.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is not reached

Do not continue driving unless a minimum tire pressure of 2.5 bar/36 psi is reached. Contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached

1. Pull the connector out of the socket in the vehicle interior.

2. Disconnect the hose from the sealant bottle and the valve on the wheel.

3. Unscrew the valve cap.

4. Stow the tire repair set in the cargo area.
5. Immediately drive 5 miles/10 km to ensure that the tire sealant is evenly distributed in the tire.
   Do not exceed the permissible maximum speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
   If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h.
   Tire sealant may spray from the damaged area during the initial wheel rotations.

Adjusting the tire pressure

1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Connect the hose directly to the compressor and turn clockwise by 90° until it audibly engages.

1. Unscrew the valve cap from the wheel and screw the connecting piece of the hose onto the valve.

1. Insert the connector into the socket in the vehicle interior.

2. Read the tire pressure on the tire pressure display of the compressor.

Do not continue driving unless a minimum tire pressure of 1.3 bar/19 psi is displayed. Contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

1. Correct the tire pressure to 2.5 bar/36 psi.

- Increase tire pressure: with standby or drive-ready state turned on, turn on the compressor and let it run for a maximum of 10 minutes.

- Reduce tire pressure: press the pressure reducing valve button on the compressor.

Remove and stow the tire repair set

1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Pull the connector out of the socket in the vehicle interior.
3. Disconnect the hose from the compressor and the valve on the wheel.
4. Unscrew the valve cap.
5. Stow the tire repair set in the cargo area.

Continuing the trip

Do not exceed the permissible maximum speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Do not exceed a maximum distance travelled of 125 miles/200 km.

Re-initialize the flat tire monitor or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Replace the faulty tire and the sealant bottle of the tire repair set promptly.

System limits

If the tire cannot be made drivable, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

With the Tire Pressure Monitor: using sealant can damage the wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.

Snow chains

General information

The manufacturer of the vehicle has determined certain wheels and tires to be suitable for operation on the vehicle.

Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.

Do not initialize the flat tire monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings.

Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings.

When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

Mounting snow chains on unsuitable tires can cause the snow chains to come into contact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Only mount snow chains on tires that are designated by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of snow chains.

Warning

Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage tires and vehicle components. There may be a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed according to the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.

Fine-link snow chains

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends the use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended as road-safe and suitable.

For information on suitable snow chains, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Use

Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size:

- 175/65 R 15.

- 175/60 R 16.

- 185/50 R 17.

John Cooper Works:

185/50 R 17.

Maximum speed with snow chains

Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.

Changing wheels/tires

General information

When using runflat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel does not always need to be changed immediately in case of a breakdown when there is a tire pressure loss due to a flat tire. If necessary, a suitable wheel change tool, e.g., a jack, is available as an accessory from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

DANGER

The jack is only provided for short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all safety precautions are observed, there is a risk of the raised vehicle falling if the jack tips over. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. If the vehicle is raised with the jack, do not lie under the vehicle and do not start the engine.

Warning

Supports such as wooden blocks under the jack reduce the load-carrying capacity of the jack to bear weight. The load-carrying capacity of the wooden blocks may be exceeded and the vehicle may tip over. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not place supports under the jack.

Warning

The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is provided in order to perform a wheel change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is not designed for frequent use, e.g., changing from summer to winter tires. Using the jack frequently may cause it to become jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only use the jack to change an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a breakdown.

Warning

The jack may slip on soft, uneven, or slippery ground, e.g., snow, ice, tiles, etc. There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid, slip-resistant surface.

Warning

The jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle and for the jacking points on the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the jack.

Warning

When the jack is not inserted into the jacking point provided for this purpose, the vehicle may be damaged or the jack may slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When cranking up the jack, ensure that it is inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel well.

Warning

A vehicle that is raised on a jack may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. While the vehicle is raised, do not exert lateral effort on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

NOTICE

Using an impact wrench to loosen or tighten the wheel lock bolt can damage the wheel lock bolt. There is a risk of damage to property. Only use a lug wrench to loosen and tighten the wheel lock bolt.

Securing the vehicle against rolling away

General information

The vehicle manufacturer recommends to additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away when changing a wheel.

On a level surface

Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to the wheel to be changed.

On a slight downhill gradient

If you need to change a wheel on a slight downhill grade, place chocks and other suit-

able objects, for instance rocks, under the wheels of both the front and rear axles against the rolling direction.

Preparing the vehicle

• Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground at a safe distance from road traffic.
• Turn on the hazard warning system.
• Set the parking brake.
• Engage a gear or move the selector lever to position P.
• As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the hazardous area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.
• Depending on the vehicle equipment, get wheel change tools and, if necessary, the emergency wheel from the vehicle.
• If necessary, set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning light at an appropriate distance.
• Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling away.
• Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking points

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are located at the marked positions.

Jacking up the vehicle

Warning

Hands and fingers can be jammed when using the jack. There is a risk of injury. Comply with the described hand position and do not change this position while using the jack.

1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1, and grasp the jack crank handle or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.

1. Insert the jack into the rectangular recess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed.

1. Extend the jack by turning the jack crank handle or lever clockwise.

1. Take your hand away from the jack as soon as the jack is under load and continue turning the jack crank handle or lever with one hand.

2. Make sure that the car jack foot extends vertically and is at a right angle beneath the jacking point.

1. Make sure that the car jack foot is vertical and at a right angle beneath the jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.

1. Crank the vehicle up until the vehicle jack has the entire surface on the

ground and the relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.

Mounting a wheel

Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.

1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on and screw in at least two lug bolts in a crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
   If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the accompanying lug bolts may have to be used as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and tighten all lug bolts well in a cross-wise pattern.
5. Turn the jack crank handle counterclockwise to retract the jack and lower the vehicle.
6. Remove the jack and stow it securely.

After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts cross-wise. The tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the faulty wheel in the cargo area, if necessary. The faulty wheel cannot be stored under the cargo area floor because of its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next opportunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor again.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Drive to the nearest authorized service center or another qualified service cen-

ter or repair shop, then have the dam- aged tire renewed.

Emergency wheel

Principle

In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel can be used in place of the wheel with the faulty tire. The emergency wheel is only intended for temporary use until the faulty tire/wheel has been replaced.

General information

Mount one emergency wheel only.

Also check the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and correct it as needed.

Safety information

Warning

The emergency wheel has particular dimensions. When driving with an emergency wheel, changed driving properties may occur, for instance reduced directional stability when braking, longer braking distance, and changed self-steering properties in the limit range. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Overview

The emergency wheel is housed in a well on the underbody of the vehicle. The screw connection of the emergency wheel is under the cargo floor panel, on the floor of the storage compartment for the onboard vehicle tool kit.

The wheel change tools are under the cargo floor panel.

Removing the emergency wheel

1. Loosen the nut using the lug wrench from the onboard vehicle tool kit.

1. Remove the retaining plate.

2. Screw lug wrench onto the thread and hold in place with one hand.

1. Unlock the locking hexagon of the emergency wheel well using the hexagon attached to retaining plate.

1. Lower the emergency wheel with the lug wrench.

2. Unscrewing the lug wrench

3. Pull out the well with emergency wheel under the vehicle toward the rear.

4. Remove the spacer and emergency wheel from the well.

5. Stow the well and spacer in the vehicle.

Renewing the tires

1. Have the damaged tire renewed.
2. Replace the emergency wheel with the new wheel.

Installing the emergency wheel

Have the emergency wheel mounted back on the vehicle by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Engine compartment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily avail-

able in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Overview

1 Filler neck for washer fluid
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Oil filler neck

4 Jump-starting, positive terminal

5 Jump-starting, negative terminal

6 Coolant reservoir

Hood

Safety information

Warning

Improperly executed work in the engine compartment can damage vehicle components and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in the engine compartment be performed by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Warning

The engine compartment accommodates moving components. Certain components in the engine compartment can also move with the vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

Warning

There are protruding parts, for instance locking hooks, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.

Warning

An incorrectly locked hood can open while driving and restrict the view. There is a risk of accident. Stop immediately and correctly close the hood.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the travel path of the hood is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

NOTICE

When the hood is closed, it must engage on both sides. Pressing again can damage the hood. There is a risk of damage to property. Open the hood again and then close it energetically. Avoid pressing again.

Opening the hood

1. Pull lever, arrow 1. Hood is unlocked.

1. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2. Hood can be opened.

Indicator/warning lights

When the hood is opened, a Check Control message is displayed.

Closing the hood

Energetically close the hood from approx. 20 in/50 cm.

The hood must engage on both sides.

Engine oil

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The engine oil consumption is dependent on your driving style and driving conditions.

Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling by taking a detailed measurement.

The engine oil consumption can increase in the following situations, for instance:

• Sporty driving style.
• Break-in of the engine.
• Idle operation of the engine.
• With use of engine oil types that are classified as not suitable.

Different Check Control messages appear, depending on the engine oil level.

The vehicle manufacturer recommends having the engine oil changed by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add too much engine oil. If there is excess engine oil, have the engine oil level corrected by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

NOTICE

Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion can cause increased engine wear and thus engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. It is recommended that you do not exceed the service intervals indicated in the vehicle.

Electronic oil measurement

General information

The electronic oil measurement has two measuring principles:

• Monitoring.
• Detailed measurement.

When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, for in-

stance when cornering aggressively, regularly perform a detailed measurement.

Monitoring

Principle

The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and can be shown on the control display.

If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed.

Functional requirements

A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of normal driving.

Displaying the engine oil level

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

System limits

When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, it may not be possible to calculate a measured value. In this case, the measured value for the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed.

Detailed measurement

Principle

The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle is stationary and displayed via a scale. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed.

General information

During the measurement, the idle speed is increased somewhat.

Functional requirements

• Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
• Manual transmission: gearshift lever in idle position, clutch and accelerator pedals not depressed.
• Steptronic transmission: selector lever in selector lever position N or P and accelerator pedal not depressed.
• Engine is running and is at operating temperature.

Performing a detailed measurement

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Measure engine oil level"
5. "Start measurement"

The engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.

Adding engine oil

General information

Only add engine oil when the message is displayed in the instrument cluster. The top-up quantity is indicated in the message displayed in the instrument cluster.

Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to page 278.

Safely park the vehicle and switch off the ignition before adding engine oil.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Safety information

Warning

Operating materials, for instance oils, greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Follow the instructions on the containers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add too much engine oil. If there is excess engine oil, have the engine oil level corrected by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Overview

The oil filler neck is located in the engine compartment, refer to page 272.

Adding engine oil

1. Open the hood, refer to page 273.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.

1. Add engine oil.
2. Close the lid.

Engine oil types to add

General information

The engine oil grade is critical for the service life of the engine.

Only add with the types of engine oil which are listed.

Safety information

NOTICE

Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use oil additives.

NOTICE

Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk of damage to property. When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil specification.

Suitable engine oil types

When topping up engine oil, the following oil specification applies:

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-17 FE+.

Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added:

Oil specification

API SL.

API SM.

API SN.

Viscosity grades

When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has a suitable viscosity grade. The suitable viscosity grade is indicated on a sign in the engine compartment.

Viscosity grades

SAE 0W-20.

More information about suitable oil specifications and engine oil viscosity grades can be requested from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

MINI recommends

MINI Original Engine Oil.

Coolant

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Coolant consists of water and coolant additive.

Not all commercially available coolant additives are suitable for the vehicle. The vehicle manufacturer recommends using coolant with the BMW LC-18 specification. Do not mix coolant additives of different colors. Use a 50:50 mixing ratio of water to coolant additive. Information on suitable coolant additives can be provided by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

With the engine hot and the cooling system open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down.

Warning

Additives are harmful and incorrect additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Do not allow additives to come into contact with skin, eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives only.

Coolant level

Checking

There are yellow minimum and maximum marks in the coolant reservoir.

1. Let the engine cool down.
2. Open the hood, refer to page 273.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

1. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

2. The coolant level is correct if it lies between the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.

1. Close the lid.

Adding coolant

1. Let the engine cool down.
2. Open the hood, refer to page 273.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

1. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
2. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified fill level; do not overfill.
3. Close the lid.
4. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.

Disposal

Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives.

Maintenance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

MINI maintenance system

The maintenance system provides service notifications and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the operational reliability of the vehicle.

In some cases, scopes and intervals of the maintenance system may vary according to the country version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated separately. Further information is available from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Condition Based Service

Principle

Condition Based Service determines the maintenance recommendation using sensors and special algorithms that take into account the operating conditions of the vehicle.

The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile.

General information

Information on service notifications, refer to page 132, can be displayed on the control display.

Service data in the vehicle key

Information on the service notifications is continuously stored in the vehicle key. The authorized service center can read this data out and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehicle.

Therefore, hand the service advisor the vehicle key with which the vehicle was driven most recently.

Stationary periods

Stationary periods during which the vehicle battery was disconnected are not taken into account.

Have an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop perform time-dependent maintenance procedures, e.g., checking the brake fluid, engine oil, and microfilter/carbon filter.

Maintenance Booklet for US Models

Please consult your Maintenance Booklet for additional information on the performance of service and maintenance work.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that maintenance and repair be performed by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair

shop. Records of regular maintenance and repair work should be retained.

Diagnostic socket

General information

Devices connected to the diagnostic socket will trigger the alarm system after locking the vehicle. Remove devices connected to the diagnostic socket before locking the vehicle.

Safety information

NOTICE

The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intricate component intended to be used in conjunction with specialized equipment to check the vehicle's primary emissions system. Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diagnosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose, can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates risks of personal and property damage. Given the foregoing, the manufacture of the vehicle strongly recommends that access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for purposes of properly utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.

Position

On the driver's side, there is a socket for on-board diagnosis to check components that are relevant for the vehicle's emission mix.

Emissions

- The warning light illuminates: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

- The warning light flashes under certain circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the vehicle checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter.

Replacing components

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Onboard vehicle tool kit

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the right side under the cargo floor panel or in a bag on the right side of the cargo area.

After use, secure the bag with the onboard vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.

Wiper blades

Safety information

NOTICE

The window may sustain damage if the wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade installed. There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold in or switch on the wiper without a wiper blade installed.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

Replacing the front wiper blades

1. To change the wiper blades, bring wipers into fold-out position.
2. Fold out and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.

1. Pull the wiper blade down out of the holder on the wiper arm, arrow 1.

1. Pull the wiper blade free from the holder of the wiper arm, arrow 2.
2. Insert and lock a new wiper blade in reverse order.
3. Fold in the wiper arm.

Replacing the rear wiper blade

1. Fold out and hold the wiper arm firmly.
2. Turn back the wiper blade to the stop.

1. Push the wiper blade out of the fastening by continuing to turn it to the stop.
2. Insert the new wiper blade by following the steps in reverse order. The wiper blade must engage audibly.
3. Fold in the wiper arm.

Light and bulb replacement

General information

Lights and bulbs

Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution to driving safety.

Except for the reversing light, all headlights and lights are designed in LED technology.

The vehicle manufacturer recommends having necessary work performed by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if you are unfamiliar with performing this work or if it has not been described here.

A replacement bulb set is available from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Follow the safety information, refer to page 284.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Some items of equipment use light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light source. These light-emitting diodes are related to conventional lasers and are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Follow the safety information, refer to page 284.

Safety information

Lights and bulbs

Warning

Bulbs can get hot during operation. Contact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they have cooled off.

Warning

Work on switched-on lighting systems can cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When working on the lighting system, switch off the lights in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufacturer's instructions.

NOTICE

Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not hold new glass bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Warning

Intense brightness can irritate or damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not look directly into the headlights or other light sources. Do not remove the LED covers.

Headlight glass

The inside of the headlight glass can fog up in cool or humid weather. When driving with the lights switched on, the condensation evaporates after a short time. The headlight glass does not need to be changed.

If, despite driving with the headlights switched on, moisture such as water droplets increasingly forms in the light, have the headlights checked.

Tail lights, bulb exchange

Overview

All tail lights

1 Side tail lights
2 Rear fog light
3 License plate light
4 Center brake light

Side tail lights

1 Tail lights
2 Turn signals/brake lights
3 Turn signals/brake lights
4 Reversing lights

Side tail lights

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 284.

Bulb, reversing lights: P21W.

1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove left or right cover.

1. Turn the bulb holder for the reversing light, arrow, counterclockwise and remove it.

1. Remove the light bracket from the opening.
2. Press the faulty bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

1. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the light bracket. Make sure that the light bracket engages in all fasteners.

Central brake light and license plate lights

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 284.

The lights feature LED technology. In the event of a malfunction, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Vehicle battery

General information

The battery is maintenance-free.

More information on the battery can be requested from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

DANGER

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.

Warning

Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. Only vehicle batteries that are compatible with the vehicle type should be installed in the vehicle. Information on compatible vehicle batteries is available at an authorized service center.

Registering the battery to the vehicle

The vehicle manufacturer recommends having an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has been changed. Once the battery has been registered again, all comfort features will be available without limitation and any Check Control messages displayed which relate to comfort features will disappear.

Charging the battery

General information

Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life.

A discharged battery is indicated by a red indicator light.

Charge the battery when acceleration is insufficient.

The following circumstances can have a negative effect on the performance of the battery:

• Frequent short-distance drives.
• Stationary periods of more than one month.

Safety information

Warning

Battery chargers that charge the vehicle battery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V electrical system. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the jump-start terminals in the engine compartment.

Charging the battery

Charge the battery only when the engine is off and via the jump-start terminals, refer to page 292, in the engine compartment.

Power interruption

After a power interruption, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual settings updated, for example:

• Memory function: store the positions again.
• Time: update.
• Date: update.
• Glass sunroof: initialize the system.

Disposing of old batteries

Have old batteries disposed of by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop, or take them to a collection point.

Maintain the filled battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses

Safety information

Warning

Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload electrical lines and components. There is a risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating.

Accessing the fuses

The fuses are located in the glove compartment.

1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Swing the cover down, arrow.

Information on the fuse layout, as well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is available on the Internet: www.mini.com/fusecard.

Where applicable, information on the fuse layout is also found on a separate sheet in the fuse box.

Replacing fuses

The vehicle manufacturer recommends having the fuses replaced by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Breakdown Assistance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the control display.

The red light in the button flashes when the hazard warning flashers are activated.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in the tailgate. To remove, loosen the brackets.

First-aid kit

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country-specific version, the vehicle is equipped with a first-aid kit.

Some of the articles have a limited service life.

Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly.

Storage

Storage for the first-aid kit is provided in the cargo area.

MINI Roadside Assistance

Principle

MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown.

General information

In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehicle's condition is sent to the vehicle manufacturer.

There are various ways of making contact.

- Via a Check Control message, refer to page 125.

- Calling with a mobile phone.

Prerequisites

• Active MINI Connected contract or equipment version with intelligent emergency call.
• Cellular network reception.
• The ignition is switched on.

Starting

If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, support is offered through Teleservice Diagnosis.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the MINI Roadside Assistance is established.

A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.

Teleservice Diagnosis

Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that is important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is transmitted automatically.

Teleservice Help

Depending on the country, the Teleservice Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle via wireless transmission.

You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it through the Service Specialist.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Control display is switched on.
4. Confirm Teleservice Help.

The driving ability of the vehicle can be restored for specific functions.

If this is not possible, further measures will be initiated, for instance Mobile Assistance vehicle will be informed.

Emergency Call

Intelligent emergency call

Principle

In case of an emergency, an emergency call can be triggered automatically by the system or manually.

General information

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version, the vehicle is equipped with an Assist system.

Only press the SOS button in an emergency. The Intelligent Assist system establishes a connection with the MINI Response Center.

For technical reasons, the emergency call cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable conditions.

Overview

SOS button in the headliner

Functional requirements

• The ignition is switched on.
• The Assist system is functional.
• If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent emergency call: the integrated SIM card in the vehicle has been activated.

Automatic triggering

When certain prerequisites are met, for instance if the airbags deploy, an emergency call is automatically initiated immediately after an accident of corresponding severity. Automatic Collision Notification is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

Manual triggering

1. Press the cover flap briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the button illuminates green.
3. The LED is illuminated green when an emergency call has been initiated. If the situation allows, wait in the vehicle until the voice connection has been established.
4. The LED flashes green when a connection to the MINI Response Center has been established.

The MINI Response Center then makes contact with you and takes further steps to help you.

Even if you are unable to respond, the MINI Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circumstances.

For this purpose, data that serves to determine the necessary rescue measures, for instance the current position of the vehicle when it can be determined, is transmitted to the MINI Response Center.

If you can no longer hear the MINI Response Center through the loudspeakers, the hands-free system, for instance, may be broken. However, the MINI Response Center may still be able to hear you.

The MINI Response Center ends the emergency call.

Jump-starting

General information

If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles.

Safety information

DANGER

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.

Warning

If the jumper cables are connected in the incorrect order, spark formation may occur. There is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order during connection.

Warning

In the case of body contact between the two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump-starting. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that no body contact occurs.

Preparation

1. Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
3. Switch off any electrical components in both vehicles.

Jump-start terminals

The jump-start terminal in the engine compartment, refer to page 272, acts as the positive battery terminal.

Open the lid of the jump-start terminal.

The body ground or a special connection on the body in the engine compartment, refer to page 272, acts as the negative battery terminal.

Connecting the cables

To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following procedure.

1. Pull off the cover cap of the jump-start terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive battery terminal, or to the corresponding jump-start terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive battery terminal, or to the corresponding jump-start terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative battery terminal, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative battery terminal, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way.
   If the first attempt to start the engine is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order.

Check the battery and recharge, if needed.

Tow-starting and towing

Safety information

Warning

When towing with Intelligent Safety systems enabled or Cruise Control switched on, individual functions may not work correctly. There is a risk of accident. Switch off all Intelligent Safety systems and Cruise Control before towing.

Manual transmission

Towing or pushing the vehicle

A broken-down vehicle can be towed or pushed.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 115.

NOTICE

If manual unlocking of the parking brake is not possible, the vehicle cannot be moved or towed. There is a risk of damage to property. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.

Follow the following instructions:

• Make sure that the ignition is switched on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn signals, and wipers may be unavailable.
• Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
• When the engine is stopped, there is no power assistance. Consequently, more

effort needs to be applied when braking and steering.

• Larger steering wheel movements are required.
• The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control handling.
• Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h.
• Do not exceed a towing distance of 30 miles/50 km.

Tow truck

With driven front axle

The vehicle should be transported with a tow truck with a so-called spectacle lift or on a loading platform.

Steptronic transmission with driven front axle: transporting the vehicle

General information

The vehicle must not be towed if the front wheels are touching the ground.

Safety information

NOTICE

The vehicle can be damaged when towing the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is a risk of damage to property. Have vehicle towed only with lifted front axle or on a loading platform.

Warning

The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.

- Lift the vehicle using suitable means.

- Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.

Pushing the vehicle

To remove a broken-down vehicle from the hazardous area, push it for a short distance at a speed of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 117.

Tow truck

The vehicle should be transported with a tow truck with a so-called spectacle lift or on a loading platform.

Towing other vehicles

General information

Switch on the hazard warning system, depending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear window.

Safety information

Warning

If the approved gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not be possible to control handling. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.

NOTICE

If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incorrectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur. There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.

Tow bar

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles.

If it is impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an inclination, note the following:

- Free movement is limited when cornering.

- The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an inclination.

Tow rope

Observe the following notes when using the tow rope:

• Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
• Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when fastening.
• Check the attachment of the tow fitting and tow rope in regular intervals.
• Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h.
• Do not exceed a towing distance of 3 miles/5 km.
• When driving off to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

Tow fitting

General information

The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried in the vehicle.

The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the vehicle.

The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 283, are together in the cargo area.

Use of the tow fitting:

• Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it in to the stop.

• Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only.

• Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.

• Check the attachment of the tow fitting in regular intervals.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the notes on using the tow fitting.

Screw thread for tow fitting

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are located in the front and rear of the vehicle on the right side with respect to the driving direction.

Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out.

Tow-starting

Manual transmission

If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 291. If the vehicle is equipped with a

catalytic converter, only tow-start while the engine is cold.

1. Switch on the hazard warning system and comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 97.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch pedal pressed and slowly release the pedal. After the engine starts, immediately press on the clutch pedal again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or tow rope, and switch off the hazard warning system.
6. Have vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Steptronic transmission

Do not tow-start the vehicle.

Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to the Steptronic transmission.

Have the cause of starting issues corrected by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Vehicle Care

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Washing the vehicle

General information

Regularly remove foreign bodies such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised.

Wash the vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense contamination and road salt can damage the vehicle.

Safety information

NOTICE

When washing with an open fuel filler flap, damage may occur. There is a risk of damage to property. Close the fuel filler flap before washing. Clean dirt behind the fuel filler flap with a cloth.

Steam cleaners or high pressure cleaners

Safety information

NOTICE

When cleaning with high pressure cleaners, components can be damaged due to the pressure or temperatures being too high. There is a risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient distance and do not spray too long continuously. Follow the operating instructions for the high pressure cleaners.

Distances and temperature

• Maximum temperature: 140 °F/60 °C.
• Minimum distance from sensors, cameras, seals and lights: 12 inches/30 cm.
• Minimum distance from glass sunroof: 31.5 in/80 cm.

Automatic car washes or car washes

Safety information

NOTICE

Using a car wash with high pressure washers may result in water penetration of window areas. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not drive into high-pressure car wash systems.

NOTICE

Improper use of automatic car washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the following instructions:

• Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.
• Do not drive through a car wash with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to the body.
• Observe the tire width of the guide rail to avoid damage to tires and rims.
• Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to the exterior mirrors.
• Unscrew the rod antenna to avoid the rod antenna breaking off.
• Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain sensor to avoid damage to the window wiper system.

Driving into a car wash with a manual transmission

In car washes, the vehicle must be able to roll freely.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 115.

Driving into a car wash with a Steptronic transmission

In car washes, the vehicle must be able to roll freely.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 117.

Some car washes do not permit persons in the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever position N. A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Driving out of a car wash

Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.

Start the engine, refer to page 98.

Lights

Do not rub wet lights dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents or cleaning agents containing alcohol.

Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance from insects, with auto shampoo and wash off with water.

Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking effect can be reduced. The heat generated during braking dries brake disks and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Completely remove all residues on the windows to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care

Vehicle care products

General information

MINI recommends using vehicle care and cleaning agents from MINI. Suitable vehicle care products are available from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

Cleaning agents can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health. There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the instructions on the packaging.

Vehicle paintwork

General information

Regular vehicle care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural contaminants, such as tree resin or pollen, can affect the vehicle paintwork. Tailor the frequency and extent of the vehicle care to these influences.

Corrosive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed immediately to prevent the finish from being altered or discolored.

Matte paintwork

Only use cleaning and care products suitable for vehicles with matte paintwork.

Leather care

Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to heavy abrasion and premature degradation of the leather surface.

To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, clean leather and provide leather care roughly every two months.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently because contamination on such surfaces is substantially more visible.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective coating of the leather surface.

Synthetic leather care

Clean synthetic leather regularly with a damp microfiber cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, dust and road grime particles will rub into pores and folds, causing significant abrasion and premature degradation of the surface.

In case of major soiling, use a moist soft sponge or microfiber cloth with suitable interior cleaners.

Immediately remove aggressive substances such as sunscreen to prevent the synthetic leather from being altered or discolored.

Upholstery material care

General information

Vacuum the cushions regularly with a vacuum cleaner.

If upholstery is very contaminated, for instance with beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.

Clean the cushions down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

Safety information

NOTICE

Open hook and loop fasteners on articles of clothing can damage the seat covers and other cloth upholstery in the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro ^® fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels

When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral rim cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam cleaners above 140 °F/60 °C. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective coating of adjacent components, such as the brake disk.

After cleaning, apply the brakes shortly to dry them. The heat generated during braking dries brake disks and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Chrome surfaces

Carefully clean components such as the radiator grille or door handles with plenty of water, if necessary, with auto shampoo added, particularly when they have been exposed to road salt.

Rubber components

Environmental influences can cause surface contamination of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.

Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber care products at regular intervals. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing vehicle care products in order to avoid damage or noises.

Wiper blades

The wiper blades are cleaned by using the washer system.

Avoid cleaning the wiper blades manually, as this may reduce wiper performance.

Fine wood parts

Clean fine wood facing and fine wood components only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic components

NOTICE

Solvent cleaners that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, cold cleaning agents, fuel and such, can damage plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to property. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.

Do not soak the headliner.

Seat belts

Warning

Chemical solvent cleaners can destroy the seat belt fabric. Missing protective effect of the seat belts. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Use only a mild soap solution for cleaning the seat belts.

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Use only a mild soap solution, with the seat belts clipped into their buckles.

Seat belts should only be allowed to retract if they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats

Warning

Objects in the driver's footwell can limit the pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's footwell. Use

floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning.

Floor mats can be removed from the car's interior for cleaning.

If the floor carpets are very contaminated, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the driving direction only.

Sensor/camera lenses

To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent.

Displays/Screens/Projection screen

NOTICE

Chemical solvent cleaners, moisture or fluids of any kind can damage the surface of displays and screens. There is a risk of damage to property. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

NOTICE

The surface of displays can be damaged with improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do not use any scratching materials.

Use a dry, clean antistatic microfiber cloth.

For stubborn soiling on the projection screen of the Head-up display, dampen the microfiber cloth with ethyl alcohol. Projection screen, refer to page 141.

Taking the vehicle out of service

When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must be taken. For more information, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Technical data

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional equipment offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily avail-

able in the vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The technical data and specifications in the Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. Vehicle-specific data may deviate from this, for instance due to the optional equipment chosen, national-market version, or country-specific measuring process. More

specific values can be obtained in approval documents, on the vehicle info label, or from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Dimensions

The dimensions can vary depending on the model version, equipment version or country-specific measurement procedure.

The height of the vehicle can also differ, e.g., due to tires and vehicle load.

MINI 5-door model

Width with mirrors in/mm 75.9/1,928

Width without mirrors in/mm 68/1,727

Height in/mm 56.1/1,425

Length in/mm 159.1/4,040

Wheelbase in/mm 101.1/2,567

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 36.4/11

MINI 3-door model

Width with mirrors in/mm 75.9/1,928

Width without mirrors in/mm 68/1,727

Height in/mm 55.7/1,414

MINI 3-door model

Length in/mm 152.8/3,880
Wheelbase in/mm 98.2/2,495
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 35.4/10.8

Weights

MINI Cooper, 3-door model
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,505/1,590
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,549/1,610
Payload
Manual transmission lbs/kg 697/316
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 694/315
Approved front axle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,973/895
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,028/920
Approved rear axle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,664/755
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 1,664/755

MINI Cooper, 5-door model

Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,781/1,715
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,836/1,740
Payload
Manual transmission lbs/kg 838/380
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 847/384
Approved front axle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,061/935

MINI Cooper, 5-door model

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,116/960
Approved rear axle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,863/845
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 1,863/845

MINI Cooper S, 3-door model

Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,616/1,640
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,627/1,645
Payload
Manual transmission lbs/kg 710/322
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 692/314
Approved front axle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,061/935
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,094/950
Approved rear axle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,687/765
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 1,687/765

MINI Cooper S, 5-door model

Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,869/1,755
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,913/1,775
Payload
Manual transmission lbs/kg 840/381
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 858/389
Approved front axle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,150/975
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,183/990

MINI Cooper S, 5-door model

Approved rear axle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,896/860

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 1,896/860

MINI John Cooper Works, 3-door model

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,715/1,685

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,770/1,710

Payload

Manual transmission lbs/kg 787/357

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 772/350

Approved front axle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,072/940

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,150/975

Approved rear axle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,764/800

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 1,764/800

Filling capacities

MINI

Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 11.6/44.0

Observe further information on fuel quality, refer to page 248.

Appendix

Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehicle are listed here.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

The following chapters were updated in the printed version of the Owner's Manual after the editorial deadline for the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed:

• Operation: Displays: Check Control: Indicator lights and warning lights: Red lights: Brake system.
• Operation: Displays: Check Control: Indicator lights and warning lights: Yellow lights: Antilock Braking System, brake system, and Dynamic Stability Control.
• Operation: Driving Stability Control systems: Antilock Braking System.
• Operation: Driving Stability Control systems: Dynamic Stability Control: Display on instrument cluster.

Everything from A to Z

Index

A

ABS, see Antilock Braking System 176

Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 120

Accessories and parts 9

ACC, see Cruise Control with Distance Control 181

Activated charcoal filter 209

Activation times, pre-ventilation 210

Active Cruise Control 181

Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 162

Adaptive suspension 178

Adding engine oil types 277

Additives, engine oil types 277

Adjusting menu contents, Central Information Display (CID) 41

Adjustments, steering wheel 89

Airbags 151

Airbags, indicator and warning light 153

Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 205, 208

Air conditioning, climate 207

Air conditioning system 204

Air distribution, manual 205, 209

Air drying, see air conditioning 207

Air flow, air conditioning system 205

Air flow, automatic climate control 208

Air outlets, see Ventilation 209

Air pressure, tires 250

Air vent, see Ventilation 209

Alarm activation 73

Alarm system 73

Alarm triggering 73

Alarm, unintentional 74

All-season tires, see Winter tires 260

All-season tires, tread 258

Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 113

Antilock Braking System 176

Apps, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Aquaplaning 236

Arrival time 138

Ashtray 217

Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off assistant 179

Assistance with breakdown 289

Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Authorized service center, see MINI Road-side Assistance 289

Automatic climate control 206

Automatic control, headlight 146

Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 88

Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger airbags 153

Automatic dimming, see Automatic High Beam Assistant 147

Automatic headlight control 146

Automatic High Beam Assistant 147

Automatic locking 72

Automatic Parking Assistant 198

Automatic program, automatic climate control 208

Automatic transmission, see Steptronic transmission 115

Automatic unlocking 73

AUTO program, automatic climate control 208

AUTO program, intensity 208

Auto Start/Stop function 100

Average consumption 137

Average speed 137

Axle loads, approved 303

B

Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 81

Backrest, seats 80

Bad weather light 148

Battery, disposing of 287

Battery, vehicle 286

Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 293

Belts, see Seat belts 83

Beverage holder, see Cup holders 225

Blocking, power window, see Safety switch 76

Blower 205, 208

Bluetooth connection 52

Bonus range, GREEN Mode 242

Bottle holder, see Cup holders 225

Brake assistant 176

Brake disks, break-in 234

Brake disks, see Brake system 234

Brake pads, break-in 234

Brake pads, see Brake system 234

Brake system 234

Braking, information 236

Breakdown assistance 289

Break-in 234

Brightness, control display 49

Bulb replacement 284

Bulb replacement, rear 285

Bulbs and lights 284

Buttons on the steering wheel 32

Button, SOS, see Intelligent emergency call 290

Button, Start/Stop 97

Bypassing, see Jump-starting 291

C

Calendar day, see Date 47

California Proposition 65 Warning 9

Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelligent Safety 162

Camera lenses, care 301

Camera, rearview camera 195

Can holder, see Cup holders 225

Care 297

Care, displays, screens 301

Care, light-alloy wheels 300

Care, vehicle 298

Cargo 227

Cargo area 227

Cargo area, adapting size 231

Cargo area, enlarging 229

Cargo area lid 68

Cargo area, storage compartments 229

Cargo cover 229

Cargo position, rear seat backrest 229

Cargo, stowing and securing 227

Cargo straps 228

Car key, see Vehicle key 60

Carpet, care 300

Car wash 297

Car wash, automatic 297

Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas system 235

CBS, see Condition Based Service 281

Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Center armrest 224

Center console 34

Central Information Display (CID) 36

Central Information Display (CID), see Control display 39

Central instrument cluster, LED ring 140

Central locking system, unlocking, from inside 65

Central screen, see Control display 39

Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 8

Change, wheels and tires 259

Changing parts 283

Changing wheels 266

Charging cradle 219

Charging smartphone, see Wireless charging tray 219

Charging tray for smartphones, see Wireless charging tray 219

Chassis number, see Vehicle identification number 13

Check Control 125

Checking the engine oil level electronically 275

Children, seating position 91

Children, transporting safely 91

Child restraint seats 91

Child restraint system 91

Child restraint systems, mounting 92

Child safety latch 96

Child safety locks 96

Child seat installation 92

Child seat, mounting 92

Child seat mountings LATCH 94

Child seats 91

Chrome parts, care 300

Cigarette lighter 217

City light braking function 167

Cleaning, displays, screens 301

Climate control 204, 206

Clothes hooks 225

Coasting 243

Coasting with idling engine 243

Coat hooks 225

Comfort Access 66

Comfort entry 61

Compartments in the doors 224

Compass 215

Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 52

Compatible mobile phones 52

Compressor 262

Computer, see On-board computer 136

Condensation under the vehicle 237

Condensation, windows 206, 209

Condition Based Service 281

Confirmation signal from the vehicle 73

Connection, electrical devices, see Sockets 217

Connections 51

Consumption display, average consumption 137

Consumption, see Current consumption 132

Contacts, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Continued driving with a flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor 155

Continued driving with flat tire, see Flat tire monitor 160

Control display 39

Control display, brightness 49

Controller 39

Control systems, driving stability 176

Convenient closing, vehicle key 62

Convenient opening, vehicle key 61

Cooling, maximum 207

Cornering light 147

Corrosion, brake disks 237

Cosmetic mirror 217

Coupling, see Pairing 51

Courtesy lights during unlocking 61

Courtesy lights, locked vehicle 62

Cruise Control, see Cruise Control with Distance Control 181

Cruise Control with Distance Control 181

Cruise Control without Distance Control 189

Cruising range 131

Cup holder 225

Current consumption 132

Customer service, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Customer Support 6

D

Damage, tires 258

Dashboard 32

Dashboard, see Instrument cluster 122

Data memory 11

Data protection, settings 50

Data, see Personal data, deleting 50

Data, technical 302

Date 47

Date, display 131

Daytime driving lights 147

Daytime running lights 147

DCC, see Cruise Control without Distance Control 189

Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 206, 209

Defrosting, windows 206, 209

Deleting, personal data 50

Departure schedule, see Pre-ventilation 210

Destination distance 137

Destination input 6

Device, connecting 51

Device list 51

Device, registering 51

Devices, suitable 52

Diagnostic connection 282

Diagnostic socket 282

Digital clock 131

Digital compass 215

Dimensions 302

Dimmable exterior mirrors 88

Dimmable interior mirror 89

Display, date 131

Display, electronic, instrument cluster 124, 125

Display, engine temperature 137

Display, GREEN Mode 240

Display, iDrive 36

Display in instrument cluster 138

Display in the windshield, see Head-up display 141

Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 149

Display panel, see Instrument cluster 122

Displays 122

Display, speed limiting function, see Speed Limit Info 133

Disposal, coolant 280

Disposal, vehicle battery 287

Distance Control, see Cruise Control 181

Distance to destination 137

Distance Warning, see Park Distance Control 191

Divided screen view, split screen 38

Drive-off assistant 179

Drive-off assistant, see Dynamic Stability Control 176

Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 162

Driver profiles 69

Driver profiles, exporting profiles 71

Driver profiles, importing profiles 71

Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driving Modes switch 178

Driving Excitement 138

Driving mode, GREEN 240

Driving mode, GREEN Driving style analysis 245

Driving modes 178

Driving notes, break-in 234

Driving notes, general 235

Driving notes, things to remember when driving 234

Driving on racetracks 238

Driving program, configuring 179

Driving stability control systems 176

Driving, Start/Stop button 97

Driving style analysis 245

Driving through water 236

Driving tip, GREEN tip 242

Driving tips, see General driving notes 235

DSC, see Dynamic Stability Control 176

DTC, see Dynamic Traction Control 178

DVD, video, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Dynamic Cruise Control, see Cruise Control 189

Dynamic shock absorber, see Adaptive suspension 178

Dynamic Stability Control 176

Dynamic Traction Control 178

E

Electronic displays, instrument cluster 124, 125

Electronic oil measurement 275

Electronic Stability Program ESP, see Dynamic Stability Control 176

E-mail, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Emergency braking, see PostCrash-iBrake 174

Emergency call 290

Emergency service, see MINI Roadside Assistance 289

Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 247

Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 119

Emergency wheel, compact wheel, see Emergency wheel 270

Energy control 132

Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 100

Engine compartment 272

Engine coolant 279

Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 243

Engine oil 275

Engine oil filler neck 276

Engine oil, topping up 276

Engine oil types to add 277

Engine start, see Jump-starting 291

Engine start, see Starting the engine 98

Engine stop 99

Engine temperature, display 137

Entering a destination, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Equipment, interior 212

ESP Electronic Stability Program, see Dynamic Stability Control 176

Exchange, wheels and tires 259

Exhaust gas system 235

Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 235

Exterior mirror 87

Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 88

Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 88

External start, see Jump-starting 291

External temperature display 131

External temperature warning 131

Eyes for securing cargo 228

F

Failure message, see Check Control 125

Fan, see Air flow 205, 208

Fastening seat belts, see Seat belts 83

Fatigue Alert 174

Fatigue warner, see Fatigue Alert 174

Fault indications, see Check Control 125

Filler neck for engine oil 276

Filter, see Microfilter 206

Fine wood parts, care 300

First-aid kit 289

Fish, MINIMALISM display 245

Flat tire, changing wheels 266

Flat tire, continued driving, see Flat tire monitor 160

Flat tire, continued driving, see Tire Pressure Monitor 155

Flat tire message, see Flat tire monitor 160

Flat tire message, see Tire Pressure Monitor 156

Flat tire monitor 160

Flat tire, repairing 261

Flat tire, see Flat tire monitor 160

Flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor 155

Flat tire warning light, see Flat tire monitor 160

Flat tire warning light, see Tire Pressure Monitor 156

Floods, driving through 236

Floor carpet, care 300

Floor mats, care 300

Fold-away position, wiper 109, 112

Fold-out position 109, 112

Foot brake 236

Forward Collision Warning with city collision mitigation 163

Forward Collision Warning with City light braking function 163

Forward Collision Warning with collision mitigation 163

For Your Own Safety 8

Front airbags 151

Front passenger's side exterior mirror, tilting down, see Automatic Curb Monitor 88

Front passenger airbags, automatic deactivation 153

Front-seat passenger airbag, indicator light 154

Front seats 80

Fuel 248

Fuel filler cap 246

Fuel filler flap 246

Fuel filler flap, emergency unlocking 247

Fuel gauge 130

Fuel quality 248

Fuel recommendation 248

Fuel, saving 239

Fuel tank, see Filling capacity 305

Fuses 287

G

Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal Remote Control 212

Gasoline 248

Gasoline quality 249

gearshift 114

General driving notes 235

General settings 47

Glare shield, see Sun visor 217

Glass sunroof, initialize the system 79

Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun-roof 77

Global Positioning System geolocation 48

Glove compartment 223

GPS geolocation, vehicle position 48

GPS navigation, navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

GREEN bonus range 242

GREEN Mode 240

GREEN - program, driving dynamics 178

GREEN tip, driving tip 242

Gross vehicle weight, approved 303

Ground clearance 237

H

Handbrake, electric, see Parking brake, electric 103

Handbrake, manual, see Parking brake, manual 103

Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 213

Hands-free device, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Hands-free system 6

Hazard warning system 289

Head airbag 152

Headlight control, automatic 146

Headlight flasher 106

Headlight glass 285

Headlights, care 298

Headlights, turning up, dimming, see Automatic High Beam Assistant 147

Headliner 35

Head restraints and seats 80

Head restraints, front 85

Head restraints, rear 86

Head-up display 141

Head-up display, shift point indicator 143

Head-up display, sport displays 143

Head-up display, standard view 141

Heated steering wheel 89

Heated windshield 206, 209

Heavy cargo, stowing 227

Height, vehicle 302

High beams 106

Hills 237

Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 179

Holder for beverages, see Cup holders 225

HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Control 212

Homepage, see Internet 7

Hood 273

Horn 32

Hot exhaust gas system 235

Hour, see Time 47

I

iBrake - PostCrash 174

Ice warning, see External temperature warning 131

Icons 7

Icy roads, see External temperature warning 131

Identification marks, tires 256

Identification number, see Vehicle identification number 13

ID transmitter, see Vehicle key 60

Ignition key, see Vehicle key 60

Ignition off 97

Ignition on 97

Illuminated ring, central instrument cluster 140

Indicator and warning lights, see Check Control 125

Indicator light, front-seat passenger airbag 154

Indicator light, see Check Control 125

Individual air distribution 205, 209

Individual settings, see Driver profiles 69

Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wireless charging tray 219

Info Display 124

Information 6

Initialization, see flat tire monitor 160

Input, iDrive 36

Installation of child restraint systems 92

Instrument cluster 122

Instrument cluster, electronic displays 124, 125

Instrument lighting 149

Instrument panel, see Instrument cluster 122

Integrated key 65

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 6

Integrated Universal Remote Control 212

Intelligent emergency call 290

Intelligent Safety 162

Intended use 8

Intensity, AUTO program 208

Interior equipment 212

Interior lights 149

Interior lights during unlocking 61

Interior lights, locked vehicle 62

Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 89

Interior mirror, compass 215

Interior mirror, manually dimmable 88

Interior motion sensor 74

Intermittent operation 107, 110

Interval display, service notifications 132

Interval indicator, service notifications 132

Interval mode 107, 110

In the vicinity of the center console 34

In the vicinity of the roofliner 35

J

Jack 268

Jacking points 268

Jacking points for the vehicle jack 268

Jam protection system, glass sunroof 79

Jam protection system, windows 76

Jump-starting 291

Jump-starting terminals 292

Jump-start terminals 292

K

Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 66

Key, see Integrated key 65

Key, see Vehicle key 60

Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 117

Knee airbag 152

L

Labeling 256

Label on recommended tires 259

Lane boundary 170

Lane departure warning 170

Lane threshold, warning 170

Language, setting 47

Lashing eyes 228

LATCH child seat mountings 94

Launch Control 120

Leather care 299

LED headlights 284

LED ring, central instrument cluster 140

LEDs, light-emitting diodes 284

Length, vehicle 302

Letters and numbers, entering 37

Light-alloy wheels, care 300

Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 284

Lighter 217

Lighting 145

Light replacement 284

Light replacement, rear 285

Lights 145

Lights and bulbs 284

Lights, care 298

Light switch 145

LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 172

List, instrument cluster, see Selection lists 135

List, notifications, see Notifications 49

Load 228

Loading 227

Loading position 229

Loading the cargo area, see Stowing cargo 227

Local time, see Time 47

Location, vehicle position 48

Locking, automatic 72

Locking, from inside 65

Locking, settings 72

Low beams, operation 145

Lower back support, see Lumbar support 81

Luggage rack, refer to Roof bars 237

Luggage straps 228

Lumbar support 81

M

Maintenance 281

Maintenance recommendation, see Condition Based Service 281

Maintenance, service notifications 132

Maintenance system, MINI 281

Make-up mirror 217

Malfunction displays, see Check Control 125

Malfunction, vehicle key 64

Manual air flow 205

Manual brake, electric, see Parking brake, electric 103

Manual brake, manual, see Parking brake, manual 103

Manual control, air distribution 205, 209

Manual control, air flow 208

Manual mode, transmission 118

Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Control 193

Manual operation, rearview camera 196

Manual Speed Limiter 172

Manual transmission 114

Manual transmission, see Manual transmission 114

Map update, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Matte paintwork 299

Matt paint, care 299

Maximum cooling 207

Maximum speed, display, see Speed Limit Info 133

Maximum speed, winter tires 260

Mechanical key 65

Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 289

Menus, Central Information Display (CID) 40

Messages, see Check Control 125

Meters, see Instrument cluster 122

Microfilter 206, 209

MID - program, driving dynamics 178

MINI Connected, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

MINI driving modes 178

MINI logo projection during unlocking 61

MINI maintenance system 281

MINIMALISM analyzer 245

Minimum tread, tires 258

MINI Roadside Assistance 289

Mirrors 87

Mobile phone, connecting 51

Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Mobile phones, suitable 52

Mobile radio in the vehicle 235

Mobile Service, see MINI Roadside Assistance 289

Mobility System, see Tire repair set 261

Modifications, technical, see For Your Own Safety 8

Moisture in headlight, see Headlight glass 285

Monitor, see Control display 39

Mounting of child restraint systems 92

MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Multi-function steering wheel 32

Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32

Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

N

Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints, front 85

Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints, rear 86

Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels, care 300

Notifications 49

0

OBD, see On-board diagnosis 282

Obstacle marking, rearview camera 197

Octane number, see Gasoline quality 249

Odometer 130

Oil 275

Oil filler neck 276

Oil level, checking electronically 275

Oil service interval, service notifications 132

Oil, topping up 276

Oil types to add, engine 277

Old battery 287

On-board computer 136

On-board diagnosis 282

Onboard vehicle tool kit 283

On-call service, see MINI Roadside Assistance 289

Opening and closing 60

Opening, from inside 65

Operate tailgate with vehicle key 62

Operating concept Central Information Display (CID) operating concept 36

Operating menus, Central Information Display (CID) 36

Operation via the Controller 40

Operation via touchscreen 42

Operation via voice 44

Optional equipment, see Vehicle equipment 8

Outside temperature display 131

Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle storage 301

P

Paint, vehicle care 299

Paintwork 299

Pairing 51

Panic alarm, see Panic mode 74

Panic mode 74

Panoramic glass sunroof 77

Park Distance Control 191

Parked vehicle, condensation 237

Parking assistant 198

Parking Assistant, see Park Distance Control 191

Parking brake, electric 103

Parking brake, manual 103

Parking lights 145

Parts and accessories 9

Pathway lighting 146

Pathway lines, rearview camera 196

Payload 228

Payload, technical data 303

PDC, see Park Distance Control 191

Pedestrian Collision Warning with City Collision Mitigation 167

Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Mitigation 167

Personal data, deleting 50

Personal profile, see Driver profiles 69

Physical units, see Units of measurement, setting 48

Plastic parts, care 300

PostCrash - iBrake 174

Power failure 287

Power interruption 287

Power windows 75

Pressure monitor, tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor 155

Pressure, tires 250

Pressure warning, see Flat tire monitor 160

Pressure warning, see Tire Pressure Monitor 155

Pre-ventilation 210

Profiles, see Driver profiles 69

Programmable memory buttons, Central Information Display (CID) 43

Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam protection system 79

Protective function, windows, see Jam protection system 76

Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 39

R

Racetrack operation 238

Radio-ready state 98

Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Rain sensor 107, 110

Ratchet straps 228

Real Time Traffic Information, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Rear lights 285

Rear seat backrests, folding down 229

Rearview camera 195

Rear-view mirror 87

Rear-view mirror, exterior 87

Rear window defroster 206, 209

Rear window wiper, operation 108, 112

Rear wiper 108, 112

Recirculated-air filter, see Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter 209

Recirculated-air mode 205, 208

Recommended tire brands 259

Refueling 246

Remote control, see Vehicle key 60

Remote control, universal 212

Remote services, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Renewal, wheels and tires 259

Replace battery, vehicle key 63

Replacement, wheels and tires 259

Replacing parts 283

Reporting safety malfunctions 15

RES CNCL button, camera-based cruise control 181

RES CNCL button, Cruise Control 189

Reserve warning, see Range 131

Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor 156

Retreaded tires 260

Roadside parking lights 146

Rolling code hand-held transmitter 213

Rolling to a stop with engine decoupled, see Coasting 243

RON, see gasoline quality 249

Roof bars 237

Roofliner 35

Roof luggage rack, refer to Roof bars 237

Route, navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Rubber components, care 300

Runflat tires 261

S

Safe braking 236

Safety locks, doors, and windows 96

Safety switch, windows 76

Safety systems, see Airbags 151

Screen, see Control display 39

Screwdriver, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 283

Sealing compound, see Tire repair set 261

Seat belt reminder for driver and front passenger seat, see Seat belts 84

Seat belt reminder for the rear seats 85

Seat belts 83

Seat belts, care 300

Seat heating, front 83

Seating position for children 91

Seats and head restraints 80

Seats, front 80

Securing, cargo 227

Selection list on the instrument cluster 135

Sensors, care 301

Service and warranty 10

Service notifications, display 132

Service notifications, see Condition Based Service 281

Servotronic 180

SET button, camera-based cruise control 181

SET button, Cruise Control 189

Set clock 47

Set day, see Date 47

Set time, see Time 47

Setting, control display 49

Settings, general 47

Settings, locking/unlocking 72

Settings, mirrors 87

Settings, seats and head restraints 80

Shift lights 143

Shift paddles on the steering wheel 119

Shift point display 133

Shift point indicator, Head-up display 143

Shift recommendation for fuel-efficient driving, see Shift point display 133

Side airbag 151

Signaling, horn 32

Signals when unlocking, see Confirmation signals from the vehicle 73

Sitting safely 80

Slide/tilt glass roof 77

Smallest turning circle, vehicle 302

Smartphone, connecting 51

Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Smartphone, using via voice control 46

Snow chains 265

Sockets, electrical devices 217

Software update 57

Software, updating 57

SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 290

Sound settings, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 270

Speed control, see Cruise Control 189

Speed Limit Device, see Speed Limiter 172

Speed limit, display, see Speed Limit Info 133

Speed Limiter 172

Speed Limit Info 133

Speed Limit Info, on-board computer 138

Speed limit, see Speed Limiter 172

Speed, see Average speed 137

Speed warning 139

Split screen 38

Sport displays, Head-up display 143

Sport displays, see Driving Excitement 138

SPORT program, driving dynamics 179

Sport program, transmission 117

Stability control systems 176

Standard equipment, see Vehicle equipment 8

Standard view, Head-up display 141

Stars, MINIMALISM display 245

Start/stop, automatic function 100

Start/Stop button 97

Starting aid terminals 292

Starting the engine 98

Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Status control display, tires 155

Status information, Central Information Display (CID) 37

Status of Owner's Manual 8

Status, vehicle 143

Steering column adjustment 89

Steering support, see Servotronic 180

Steering wheel, adjusting 89

Steering wheel, buttons 32

Steering wheel heating 89

Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic transmission 115

Steptronic Sport transmission with double clutch, see Steptronic transmission 115

Steptronic transmission 115

Steptronic transmission with double clutch, see Steptronic transmission 115

Stopping the engine 99

Storage compartments 223

Storage, tires 260

Storing the vehicle 301

Stowing, cargo 227

Suitable devices 52

Suitable mobile phones 52

Summer tires, tread 258

Sun visor 217

Switches, see Dashboard 32

Switch for driving dynamics 178

System language, setting, see Language, setting 47

System settings, see General settings 47

T

Tachometer 130

Tailgate 68

Tail lights 285

Taking the vehicle out of service 301

Tank capacity 305

Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 8

Technical data 302

Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Teleservices, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Temperature, air conditioning system 204

Temperature, automatic climate control 207

Temperature display for external temperature 131

Temperature, engine 137

Text message, Check Control 125

Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 73

Thigh support 82

Tilt alarm sensor 74

Tilting down, front passenger's side exterior mirror, see Automatic Curb Monitor 88

Time 47

Time of day, see Time 47

Tire brands, recommended 259

Tire change 259

Tire damage 258

Tire identification marks 256

Tire inflation pressure 250

Tire marking 256

Tire pressure 250

Tire Pressure Monitor 155

Tire pressure monitoring, see Flat tire monitor 160

Tire Pressure Monitor, reset 156

Tire pressure, tires 250

Tire pressure warning, see Flat tire monitor 160

Tire repair set 261

Tires 250

Tire sealant, see Tire repair set 261

Tires, run-flat 261

Tire tread 258

Tool 283

Touchscreen 42

Towing 293

Tow-starting 293

Traction Control 178

Traction control system, see Dynamic Stability Control 176

TRACTION, see Dynamic Traction Control 178

Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 119

Transmission, manual transmission 114

Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 115

Transporting children safely 91

Tread, tires 258

Trip computer 138

Triple turn signal activation 105

Trip odometer 130

Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 130

Trunk, see Cargo area 227

Turn indicators, see Turn signals 105

Turning circle lines, rearview camera 196

Turning circle, vehicle 302

Turn signal, indicator light 128

Turn signals, operation 105

Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 285

U

Unintentional alarm, avoiding 74

Units of measurement, setting 48

Units, see Units of measurement, setting 48

Universal remote control 212

Unlocking, automatic 73

Unlocking, settings 72

Updates made after the editorial deadline 8

Updating, software 57

Upholstery care 299

Upper retaining strap, top tether 95

USB connection 54

USB port, position in vehicle 218

Used battery, disposing of 287

Use, intended 8

V

Vanity mirror 217

Vehicle battery 286

Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assistance 289

Vehicle, break-in 234

Vehicle care 298

Vehicle care products 298

Vehicle equipment 8

Vehicle identification number 13

Vehicle issues 289

Vehicle jack 268

Vehicle key 60

Vehicle key, additional 63

Vehicle key, loss 63

Vehicle key, malfunction 64

Vehicle key, replace battery 63

Vehicle paint, care 299

Vehicle paintwork 299

Vehicle position, vehicle location 48

Vehicle status 143

Vehicle storage 301

Vehicle tracking 48

Ventilation 209

Ventilation, see Pre-ventilation 210

Venting, see Ventilation 209

VIN, see Vehicle identification number 13

Voice activation system 44

Voice control 44

Voice recognition 44

Volume, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

W

Warning and indicator lights, see Check Control 125

Warning displays, see Check Control 125

Warning messages, see Check Control 125

Warning triangle 289

Warranty 9

Warranty Booklet, see Warranty 9

Washer fluid 113

Washer nozzles, windshield 108, 112

Washing the vehicle 297

Washing, vehicle 297

Water on roads 236

Website 7

Weights 303

Welcome lights 146

Welcome lights during unlocking 61

Wheelbase 302

Wheel base, vehicle 302

Wheel change 266

Wheels 250

Wheels and tires, exchange 259

Width, vehicle 302

Windows, powered 75

Windshield cleaning system, see Wiper system 106, 110

Windshield defroster 206, 209

Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 113

Windshield washer nozzles 108, 112

Windshield wipers, see Wiper system 106, 110

Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle storage 301

Winter tires, suitable tires 260

Winter tires, tread 258

Wiper blades, changing 283

Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 113

Wiper, fold-away position 109, 112

Wipers, see Wiper system 106, 110

Wiper system 106, 110

Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wireless charging tray 219

Wireless charging tray for smartphones 219

Wood parts, care 300

Wordmatch principle 37

Word match principle, navigation 37

Working in, engine compartment 273

Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 283

California Proposition 65 Warning

For vehicles sold in California:

California Proposition 65 Warning

WARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-high-way motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.

YOUR DIGITAL VEHICLE INFORMATION.

The MINI Motorer's Guide app explains the equipment of your vehicle and offers further scopes and functions:

All information surrounding navigation, entertainment and communication

Photorealistic animations for various vehicle functions

Keyword search

360° view: Explore your vehicle interactively inside and out

Smart Scan for Apple iPhone: Icon and optical character recognition on the buttons in the vehicle

Available in more than 30 languages

Can be used offline after download